Cover Page

O

p

e

r

a

t

o

M

r

Explorer

TM

Portable Gas Chromatograph
PN 074-571-P1A<Title> Operating Manual
PN MX380301-D
1
1
Cover Page

a

n

u

a

l

Title Page

O

p

e

r

a

t

o

M

r

a

Explorer

TM

Portable Gas Chromatograph
PN 074-571-P1A

www.inficon.com©2014 INFICON

reachus@inficon.com

n

u

a

l

Trademarks
The trademarks of the products mentioned in this manual are held by the companies that
produce them.
Hayes is a trademark of Zoom Telephonics Inc.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer
The information contained in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, INFICON assumes
no responsibility for its use and shall not be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages related
to the use of this product.
Due to our continuing program of product improvements, specifications are subject to change without notice.

Copyright©2014 All rights reserved.
Reproduction or adaptation of any part of this document without permission is unlawful.

1

PRELIMINARY 4/10/14

Warranty
WARRANTY AND LIABILITY - LIMITATION: Seller warrants the products
manufactured by it, or by an affiliated company and sold by it, and described on
the reverse hereof, to be, for the period of warranty coverage specified below, freefrom defects of materials or workmanship under normal proper use and service.
The period of warranty coverage is specified for the respective products in therespective Seller instruction manuals for those products but shall not be less thanone (1) year from the date of shipment thereof by Seller. Seller's liability under thiswarranty is limited to such of the above products or parts thereof as are returned,
transportation prepaid, to Seller's plant, not later than thirty (30) days after the
expiration of the period of warranty coverage in respect thereof and are found bySeller's examination to have failed to function properly because of defective
workmanship or materials and not because of improper installation or misuse andis limited to, at Seller's election, either (a) repairing and returning the product orpart thereof, or (b) furnishing a replacement product or part thereof, transportation
prepaid by Seller in either case. In the event Buyer discovers or learns that a
product does not conform to warranty, Buyer shall immediately notify Seller inwriting of such non-conformity, specifying in reasonable detail the nature of suchnon-conformity. If Seller is not provided with such written notification, Seller shallnot be liable for any further damages which could have been avoided if Seller had
been provided with immediate written notification.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE AND ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, AS BUYER'S
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCTS TO BE SOLDHEREUNDER. All other obligations and liabilities of Seller, whether in contract or
tort (including negligence) or otherwise, are expressly EXCLUDED. In no event
shall Seller be liable for any costs, expenses or damages, whether direct orindirect, special, incidental, consequential, or other, on any claim of any defective
product, in excess of the price paid by Buyer for the product plus returntransportation charges prepaid.
No warranty is made by Seller of any Seller product which has been installed,
used or operated contrary to Seller's written instruction manual or which has been
subjected to misuse, negligence or accident or has been repaired or altered byanyone other than Seller or which has been used in a manner or for a purpose forwhich the Seller product was not designed nor against any defects due to plans or
instructions supplied to Seller by or for Buyer.
This manual is intended for private use by INFICON® Inc. and its customers.
Contact INFICON before reproducing its contents.
NOTE: These instructions do not provide for every contingency that may arise inconnection with the installation, operation or maintenance of this equipment.
Should you require further assistance, please contact INFICON.
2

www.inficon.com

reachus@inficon.com

3

Explorer Operator ManualContents
Trademarks..................................................................................................... 1
Warranty.........................................................................................................2
Declaration of Conformity...............................................................................3
Contents.......................................................................................................... 4
Warnings and Safety Information ............................................................ 12Standard Warnings........................................................................................ 13
FCC Warning......................................................................................... 13
Radio Frequency (RF) Generating Devices........................................... 13
Internal Carrier Gas Cylinder ................................................................ 13
Safe Working Practices................................................................................. 16
Compressed Gases................................................................................. 16
Battery Pack Care .................................................................................. 18
Excessive Heat and Cold ....................................................................... 18
Adequate Ventilation............................................................................. 18
ECD Safety Practices.................................................................................... 20
Government Regulations for ECDs....................................................... 20
Labels .................................................................................................... 21
Leak Testing .......................................................................................... 21
Cell Failure or Damage ......................................................................... 22
Reporting Radiation Incidents, Theft or Loss ....................................... 22
Other Requirements............................................................................... 22
Introduction ................................................................................................ 24
About this User’s Guide ............................................................................... 25
Conventions used in this manual........................................................... 25
Notes, cautions and warnings ................................................................ 26
A Brief Overview ......................................................................................... 29
Unpacking and Checking Parts..................................................................... 31
Battery Pack.................................................................................................. 32
Removing and Replacing the Battery Pack ........................................... 32
Charging the Battery Pack..................................................................... 34
Carrier Gas.................................................................................................... 36
Filling the Internal Cylinder .................................................................. 37
Connecting Carrier Gas ......................................................................... 40
Connecting Accessories................................................................................ 41
Personal Computer running SiteChart Software.................................... 41
4

Explorer Operator Manual

DC Power Cord ..................................................................................... 41
Carrying Strap ....................................................................................... 42
Telescoping Sample Probe .................................................................... 43
Three Meter Sample Line...................................................................... 46
Field Check List............................................................................................ 47
Storing Explorer............................................................................................ 49
Immediate Availability.......................................................................... 50
Availability Within 30 Minutes............................................................. 50
Availability Within 12 Hours ................................................................ 51
Using Explorer ............................................................................................. 52
Introduction .................................................................................................. 53
User and Supervisor Modes...................................................................53
Fixed Keys............................................................................................. 53
Soft Keys ............................................................................................... 54
Indicator LEDs ...................................................................................... 57
Beginning Operation..................................................................................... 58
Status Line .....................................................................................................59
Setting the Date and Time ............................................................................ 61
Reviewing the Instrument Status .................................................................. 62
Display Options ............................................................................................ 64
Entering a Tag .............................................................................................. 66
Audio Options............................................................................................... 67
Alarm Audio.......................................................................................... 67
Injection Audio...................................................................................... 67
Loop Injection Analysis................................................................................ 68
Selecting the Injection Method.............................................................. 68
Performing a Loop Injection Analysis................................................... 68
Setting Probe Length ............................................................................. 70
Performing a Syringe Injection Analysis...................................................... 71
Selecting the Injection Method...............................................................71
Performing a Syringe Injection Analysis............................................... 71
Automatic Operation .................................................................................... 74
TVOC Analysis ............................................................................................ 76
TVOC Method....................................................................................... 76
Performing a TVOC Run....................................................................... 78
TVOC Automatic Operation ................................................................. 79
Autostart GC on VOC Alarm ................................................................ 81

5

Explorer Operator Manual

Logged Data ................................................................................................. 83
Review Logged Data ............................................................................. 83
Deleting Datalogger Entries .................................................................. 84
Using the ECD.............................................................................................. 86
Setting up the ECD................................................................................ 87
High Accuracy Operation............................................................................. 88
SiteChart Software ..................................................................................... 89
Introduction ...................................................................................................90
Installation .....................................................................................................91
PC Requirements................................................................................. ...91
General Installation Information ......................................................... ..92
Installing the SiteChart software ......................................................... ..92
Upgrading from Previous Versions ..................................................... ..95
Installing your Assay Disk .................................................................... 95
Connecting the PC to Explorer ................................................................... ..96
Personal Computer .............................................................................. ..96
Communicating with Multiple Instruments......................................... ..97
Connecting a Printer to the Computer ................................................. ..97
Loading an Assay into Explorer ................................................................. ..98
Switching Assays................................................................................. ..98
Overview .................................................................................................... 100
Starting SiteChart ................................................................................ 100
The Default Window ........................................................................... 100
Sizing the Application ......................................................................... 101
The Assay Tab ............................................................................................ 102
Installing the Standard Method ........................................................... 102
Assay Wizard....................................................................................... 104
Column/Detector Selection ................................................................. 105
Method................................................................................................. 105
Reference Chromatogram.................................................................... 106
Compound Library .............................................................................. 109
Compound Library Information ................................................................. 113
Enabling Calibration Compounds ....................................................... 114
Calibration Averaging ......................................................................... 114
Other Features ..................................................................................... 115
Calibration Curve ................................................................................ 115
The Instrument Tab..................................................................................... 118
Peak Report ......................................................................................... 119

6

Explorer Operator Manual

Chromatogram..................................................................................... 120
Instrument Status................................................................................. 122
Start/Stop Button ................................................................................. 124
Saving a Run........................................................................................ 126
Printing an Analysis Report................................................................. 127
The Log Review Tab .................................................................................. 128
Log Listing .......................................................................................... 129
Update Log Listing.............................................................................. 130
File Name Format................................................................................ 131
Log Review ......................................................................................... 132
Printing the Log Review File............................................................... 132
Saving the Log Review File ................................................................ 133
Compound Review Tab .............................................................................. 134
Compound Concentration Graph......................................................... 134
Update Compound Listing .................................................................. 136
Save the Compound Review File ........................................................ 137
Printing the Compound Review File ................................................... 137
SiteChart Menus ......................................................................................... 138
File Menu............................................................................................. 138
View Menu .......................................................................................... 143
Analyzer Menu .................................................................................... 148
Communication Menu......................................................................... 152
Help Menu........................................................................................... 157
Method Development................................................................................ 159
Method Development Using SiteChart....................................................... 160
Library ................................................................................................. 160
Column Selection ................................................................................ 161
Adding Compounds to the Library...................................................... 162
Multiple Point Calibration Curve ........................................................ 165
Analysis Settings ................................................................................. 166
Integration Method .............................................................................. 175
Assay Properties .................................................................................. 182
Method Development Using Explorer Directly.......................................... 186
Selecting Columns and Detectors............................................................... 187
Adding Compounds to the Library ............................................................. 189
Analysis Settings ........................................................................................ 192
Analysis Time...................................................................................... 192
Backflush Time ................................................................................... 193
7

Explorer Operator Manual

Pump Time .......................................................................................... 193
Injection Time ..................................................................................... 195
Column Temperature.................................................................................. 197
ECD Temperature....................................................................................... 198
Pressure....................................................................................................... 199
Integration Method ..................................................................................... 200
Up Slope, Down Slope and Filter........................................................ 201
Minimum Height ................................................................................. 202
Automatic Integration.......................................................................... 203
Integrator Delay................................................................................... 204
TVOC Methods .......................................................................................... 206
Carrier Gas and Injection Time ........................................................... 206
Effects of Other Parameters.................................................................207
Calibration ................................................................................................ 210
Introduction ................................................................................................ 212
Library ........................................................................................................ 214
Selecting and Calibrating Compounds ....................................................... 215
Calibration Gas ........................................................................................... 216
Syringe Injection ................................................................................. 217
Connecting Calibration Gas........................................................................ 218
Preparing a Gas Bag Sample ...................................................................... 220
Using the Gas Bag............................................................................... 222
Calibration Procedure ................................................................................. 223
Single Detector .................................................................................... 223
Dual Detectors..................................................................................... 225
Multiple Point Calibration Curve ............................................................... 228
Line Segment Calibration Curve ......................................................... 228
Linear Calibration Curve..................................................................... 229
Quadratic and Cubic Calibration Curve .............................................. 230
Storing Multiple Points........................................................................ 231
TVOC Calibration ...................................................................................... 234
Removing Library Compounds .................................................................. 236
Maintenance and Troubleshooting ......................................................... 238
Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................ 240
Replacing the Sample Inlet Filter ............................................................... 242
Maintenance of the UV Lamp .................................................................... 244
Removing the UV Lamp ..................................................................... 244
Replacing the UV Lamp or Installing a New One............................... 245

8Explorer Operator Manual

Cleaning the UV Lamp Window......................................................... 245
Maintenance of the Injection Port............................................................... 248
Replacing the Injection Port Septum................................................... 248
Cleaning the Injection Port Assembly ................................................. 249
Flushing the Columns................................................................................. 250
Flushing a Single Column ................................................................... 250
Flushing all Three Columns ................................................................ 251
Purging the Internal Carrier Gas Cylinder.................................................. 253
Maintenance of the ECD ............................................................................ 254
Purging the ECD.................................................................................. 254
Obtaining an ECD Wipe Test Sample................................................. 255
Disposing of an ECD Cell ................................................................... 258
Downloading Firmware to Explorer ........................................................... 259
Updating Assays ......................................................................................... 263
Updating Compound Retention Time and Response........................... 263
Updating the Calibration Curve........................................................... 265
Backup Assay Files ............................................................................. 267
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 268
GC Fault Conditions............................................................................ 268
Chromatographic Troubleshooting...................................................... 272
Assay 1 User Notes................................................................................... 282
An Overview of Assay 1............................................................................. 284
The Assay 1 Disk................................................................................. 284
Installation ........................................................................................... 285
Compound Separation ................................................................................ 286
Co-elutions .......................................................................................... 290
Compound Library .............................................................................. 291
Assay 1 Standard Method........................................................................... 292
Standard Assay Library Compounds................................................... 293
Compound Elution Order .................................................................... 297
Creating a Custom Method......................................................................... 301
General Information ............................................................................ 301
Example - Benzene, Vinyl Chloride and Chloromethane ................... 302
Column Specifications................................................................................ 306
Accurate Concentration Measurement........................................................ 307
Peak Integration Errors........................................................................ 307
Sampling Errors................................................................................... 308
Adsorption ........................................................................................... 309
9Explorer Operator Manual

Detector Response Drift ...................................................................... 309
Assay 2 User Notes................................................................................... 305
An Overview of Assay 2............................................................................. 307
The Assay 2 Disk................................................................................. 307
Installation ........................................................................................... 307
Compound Separation ................................................................................ 308
Compound Library .............................................................................. 308
Interference Compounds ..................................................................... 309
Assay 2 Standard Method........................................................................... 310
Creating a Custom Method......................................................................... 312
General Information ............................................................................ 312
Example - Benzene and Toluene ......................................................... 313
Column Specifications................................................................................ 316
Accurate Concentration Measurement........................................................ 317
Peak Integration Errors........................................................................ 317
Sampling Errors................................................................................... 318
Adsorption ........................................................................................... 319
Response Drift..................................................................................... 321
Appendices ................................................................................................ 322
Technical Description................................................................................. 324
Sample Introduction ............................................................................ 325
Precolumn Backflushing ..................................................................... 326
Column Selection ................................................................................ 327
Photoionization Detector ..................................................................... 327
Analytical Engine ................................................................................ 329
Electron Capture Detector ................................................................... 330
The AC Adapter Line Cord ........................................................................ 332
Calibration Gas ........................................................................................... 333
Warranty and Service Information ............................................................. 334
SiteChart Customer License Agreement..................................................... 335
Contacting INFICON................................................................................... 339
Instrument Specifications ........................................................................... 340
Title 10, Chapter 1 CFR - Energy............................................................... 341
Sections 20.2201 and 20.2202............................................................. 341
Section 30.34 ....................................................................................... 345
Sections 30.51, 30.52 and 30.53.......................................................... 347

10

Explorer Operator Manual

Section 31.5 ......................................................................................... 349
Canadian Atomic Energy Control Regulations .......................................... 354
Part II, Sections 3 to 7 ......................................................................... 354
Part VI, Section 20 and 21................................................................... 358
Regulatory Agencies................................................................................... 361
Nuclear Regulatory Commission Regional Offices ............................ 361
Agreement States................................................................................. 362
Canadian Atomic Energy Control Board............................................. 366
Wipe Test Agencies.................................................................................... 367
United States........................................................................................ 367
Canada................................................................................................. 367

11

Warnings andSafety Information

1

Explorer Operator Manual

Warnings and Safety Information

Standard Warnings
FCC WarningThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
Digital Device, pursuant to Subpart B, Class A of Part 15 of the FCC rules. Theselimits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required tocorrect the interference at their own expense.

Radio Frequency (RF) Generating Devices
The use of RF generating devices, such as radio transmitters, cellular phones, etc.,
within a 10 meter radius can cause momentary interference in the performance of
Explorer, with respect to the signal levels being detected.

Internal Carrier Gas CylinderThis device contains a high pressure aluminum alloy cylinder maximum
pressure - 1800 psi.
WARNING

Improper use, filling, storage, or disposal of the cylinder contained
within this device may result in death, personal injury and property
damage.

13

Warnings and Safety Information

Do not alter this cylinder or the high pressure components of this device, in anyway.
Do not over pressurize this cylinder (device).
Do not expose pressurized cylinder (device) to temperatures in excess of 54 °C(130 °F).
Cylinders exposed to a fire or heated to temperatures in excess of 177 °C(350 °F) should be condemned or hydrostatically tested prior to filling.
Do not remove the warning label.

To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these
instructions:

WARNINGAll calibration, maintenance and servicing of this device, including
battery charging, must be performed in a safe area away from hazardous
locations.
For replacement battery pack use only PN 951-402-G1 .
Do not dispose of the battery pack in a fire. The cell may explode. The
battery pack contains 20% cadmium (Cd) by weight. This battery packmust be disposed of properly. Check with local codes for special disposal
instructions.
Do not open or mutilate the battery pack. It may be toxic if swallowed.
Exercise care in handling battery packs in order not to short the terminals
with conducting materials such as rings, bracelets and keys. The battery
or conductor may overheat and cause burns.
Do not defeat proper polarity orientation between the battery pack andbattery charger.
Charge the battery pack using the charger provided with or identified foruse with this product only in accordance with the instructions andlimitations specified in this manual. For battery charger use only Part No.
MX380302 (110 Volts AC).

14

Explorer Operator Manual

To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these
instructions:
WARNINGAll calibration, maintenance and servicing of this device, including
battery charging, must be performed in a safe area away fromhazardous locations.
For replacement battery pack use only Part Number 951-402-G1
Do not dispose of the battery pack in a fire. The cell may
explode. This battery pack must be disposed of properly. Check
with local codes for special disposal instructions.
Do not open or mutilate the battery pack.
Exercise care in handling battery packs in order not to short theterminals with conducting materials such as rings, bracelets andkeys. The battery or conductor may overheat and cause burns.
Do not defeat proper polarity orientation between the battery packand battery charger.
Charge the battery pack provided with or identified for use withthis product only in accordance with the instructions andlimitations specified in this manual. For battery charger use
only Part No. MX380302

15

Warnings and Safety Information

Safe Working Practices
NOTE: The following information is important, please read carefully before using Explorer.

Compressed Gases
Cylinders of compressed gas, such as the carrier gas and calibration
gas, must be handled with care.
WARNING
Please observe the following handling procedures:
Ensure each tank is clearly labeled.
Do not store cylinders in hazardous locations. Store cylinders in an uprightposition away from possible sources of heat or sparks.
Do not heat the cylinders or expose them to direct sunlight. The cylinders may
rupture at high temperatures.
Do not mutilate cylinders.
Do not drag or roll cylinders. Large cylinders should only be moved on carts
designed for compressed gas cylinders. Do not move cylinders without thevalve protection cap in place.
Always secure cylinders before removing the cylinder valve protection cap.
Always secure the calibration gas cylinder before connecting the regulator andadapter tubing.
Use only the specified regulator for the carrier and calibration gas cylinders.
Never transport Explorer while it is connected to a cylinder.
16

Explorer Operator Manual

Never plug, obstruct or tamper with safety relief devices.
Wear safety glasses and ear protection when working with compressed gases.
Regulators for Compressed Gases
Use only the specified regulator for carrier and calibration gas. Confirm
regulator type and material with your specialty gas supplier.
Use the carrier gas filling station only for refilling the internal carrier
gas cylinder (MX380303 or MX380323 for nitrogen; or MX380319 or

MX380325 for air).

Mark each regulator with its intended service and never use a regulator for
more than one service. Do not change gas service, or adapt equipment without
consulting your gas supplier.
Ensure regulator construction materials are compatible with the gas, and thatthe cylinder pressure gauge will withstand the cylinder pressure. A stainlesssteel diaphragm is suggested as this will reduce the potential for the carrier gas
to be contaminated by the regulator itself.
Never use the regulator as a shut-off valve. Close the cylinder valve when it is
not in use.
Do not subject the regulator to an inlet pressure greater than recommended.
Do not move or detach the regulator when it is pressurized or when it is in use.
Before connection, ensure the cylinder valve and the regulator CGA connection
are clean.
When connecting a regulator to a large gas cylinder turn the valve on thecylinder clockwise to close the cylinder. Turn the regulator off. Open thecylinder valve slowly and check for leaks. Adjust the delivery pressure andthen open the regulator outlet valve.

17Warnings and Safety Information

Battery Pack Care
The battery pack contains nickel-metal hydride. This battery pack must be
disposed of properly. Check with local codes for special disposal instructions.
Charge the battery pack using the AC adapter provided with, or identified for use
with, this product only, in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified
in this manual.

Excessive Heat and Cold
The normal operating temperature is 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 105 F) with 0 to 95%(non-condensing) relative humidity.
Do not expose the instrument to intense sunlight for prolonged periods. This may
result in a rise in instrument temperature and loss of oven control. Exposure toexcessive heat may also result in instrument contamination. Low temperatures willcause decreased battery life and may also result in loss of oven control. The plastics
may become fragile and shatter at extreme low temperatures.

Adequate Ventilation
If compound threshold limit values (TLVs) are exceeded, you should use a gas bagand the gas bag adapter for sampling and provide adequate ventilation duringcalibration. When using the gas bag adapter tubing, do not kink or stress thetubing. The gas bag and gas bag adapter are available in both field kits for assay 1,
assays 2, 10, and ethylene, and calibration kit for assays 1, 2, 10, and ethylene(MX380318, MX380348, MX380338, MX380358, and MX380337).

18

Explorer Operator Manual

Optionally you can vent the detector out, pump and vent ports. Use flexible tubing
fitted with luer adapters to vent these ports to a fume hood or outdoors. The detector
out ports vent the effluent from the PID (port 1) and ECD (port 2). The pressure set
by the method will determine the outlet flow rates at these ports. If the detector is
not in use Explorer supplies a maintenance flow to ensure the detector is ready for
operation.
Samples drawn by the pump to fill and flush the sampling system are vented throughthe pump out port. The flow though this port is approximately 250 ml/min when thepump is on. The two columns that are not in use are flushed constantly withapproximately 1 mL/min. The two columns are both vented through the vent out
port.

19

Warnings and Safety Information

ECD Safety Practices

WARNINGTo assure that removable radioactive contamination on the external
parts of the ECD remains at a safe level, the United States Nuclear
Regulatory Commission requires that the ECD be wipe tested at least
once every six months. A record of the results must be maintained for
NRC inspection for a period of three subsequent years.
In Canada, the ECD must be wipe tested at least once every twelve
months and a record of the results must be maintained for Atomic
Energy Control Board (AECB) inspection for a period of three years.
Thermal Runaway Protection: Explorer will cut power to theheating system if any heated zone exceeds 120 °C.

WARNING

Government Regulations for ECDs
NOTE: Do not open the instrument or attempt to remove the ECD. If the ECD must be
removed from the instrument, contact INFICON.
NOTE: The electron capture detector contains 15 millicuries of nickel-63 (Ni63), a
radioactive material. We strongly recommended that you become familiar with the
NRC regulations, as well as any other federal, state, or local regulations, covering
the use of Ni63.
Your possession and use of this detector is governed, in the U.S., by 10 C.F.R.
Section 31.5, as noted on page 349. Under the provisions of that regulation you
are deemed a General Licensee.
If you hold a specific license, you may need to meet additional requirements and be
governed by further regulations as outlined in your license.

20

Explorer Operator ManualYour possession and use of the ECD may also be regulated by the state where you
are located. The requirements of state regulatory agencies are similar to thosecontained in NRC regulation 10 C.F.R. Section 31.5, but they may differ in somerespects. You must obtain a copy of the regulations from your particular state. See
page 362 for a list of the Agreement States. Agreement States have been granted
authority by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission to regulate the possession anduse of radioactive material.
In Canada, use of the ECD is governed by Atomic Energy Control Regulations.
Under these regulations, you must obtain a possession license before you canreceive the ECD. Refer to Part II, Section 7, of the regulations for details of
applying for a license, as noted on page 356.
You must be familiar with all the regulations governing your use of the ECD. A
summary of the requirements of 10 C.F.R. Section 31.5 is listed below. The
requirements of the Atomic Energy Control Regulations are similar to those of 10
C.F.R. Section 31.5.

LabelsDo not remove any of the labels attached to the ECD cell or any of the labels
attached to your gas chromatograph that refer to the ECD cell. Follow all
instructions and abide by all precautions provided by the labels and in user
instruction manuals referred to by the labels.

Leak Testing
You are obligated under federal and state regulations to make certain that the ECD
cell is wipe tested for leakage of radioactive materials at intervals of no longer than
6 months, and that the analysis of these wipe tests is conducted by a person
specifically licensed to do so, either by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission orby an Agreement State. The analyses can be performed by the organizations listed
under Wipe Test Agencies starting on page 367.
In Canada, the ECD must be wipe tested at least once every twelve months and arecord of the results must be maintained for AECB inspection for a period of three
years. See Obtaining an ECD Wipe Test Sample on page 255 for detailed
procedure.
21

Warnings and Safety Information

Cell Failure or Damage
If a leak test detects more than 0.005 microcuries of removable Ni 63 on the surface of
the ECD cell, or if the cell itself is damaged in such a way as to indicate that it may
no longer adequately shield the radioactive material inside, you must immediately
suspend operation of your gas chromatograph until the cell has been repaired or
disposed of by a person specifically licensed to do so.
You must report any such incident, to the Regional Office, Inspection and
Enforcement, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. You must also report theincident to the regulatory authority of your Agreement State.
In Canada, you must report the incident to the AECB, see page 367.

Reporting Radiation Incidents, Theft or Loss
Please read NRC Regulation 10 C.F.R. Section 20.2201 and 20.2202, as
reproduced starting on page 341.
In Canada, read Atomic Energy Control Regulations, Part VI, Section 20,
as reproduced starting on page 358.
These regulations describe your duties should Explorer, equipped with an ECD,
be lost, stolen, or released, or should any person be exposed to radiation.

Other Requirements
Regulation 10 C.F.R. Section 31.5 does not permit you to abandon Explorer,equipped with an ECD, or export it. It may not be transferred except to a person
specifically licensed to receive it. Within thirty days of such a transfer, you must
report to the Director of Nuclear Material Safety and Safeguards, U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission, Washington, D.C. 20555, the name and address of thetransferee.

22

Explorer Operator Manual

A report is not required, by the NRC, to transfer a used or defective Explorer,equipped with an ECD, to INFICON in order to obtain a replacement. You may
transfer Explorer, equipped with an ECD, to another general licensee, like yourself,
only when it remains at the same location to which it was shipped by INFICON.
Give the transferee a copy of these instructions and the regulations and report to the
NRC as required in Regulation 10 C.F.R. Section 31.5.
Do not open or disassemble Explorer.

WARNING

23

Introduction

2

Introduction

About this Users Guide
This manual provides detailed instructions for setup, operation and maintenanceof the INFICON Explorer Portable Gas Chromatograph.

Conventions used in this manual
Normal text is used to provide information and instructions.
Standard Bold text refers to Fixed keys on the instrument.
UPPERCASE text refers to Soft keys on the screen of the instrument.
Bold Italic text refers to keys on the PC keyboard.
Non-serif Bold text refers to text that is displayed on the PC screen.

All eight digit numbers are INFICON part numbers unless stated otherwise.

To provide keyboard information, the following shortcut key sequences areused:
Shift + Tab

Hold down the Shift key while pressing the Tab key.

F, A

Press and release each of these keys in order: First F, andthen A.

Arrow Keys

This is the collective name for the UP ARROW, DOWN
ARROW, LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys.

25

Explorer Operator Manual

Three mouse actions are used in most procedures:
Point

Moving the mouse to place the pointer over an item is called
pointing.

Click

Pointing to an item on your screen and then quickly pressing andreleasing the left mouse button is called clicking.

Drag

Holding down the left mouse button as you move the pointer iscalled dragging.

Notes, cautions and warnings
Three terms, in the following standard formats, are also used to highlight special
circumstances and warnings.
NOTE: A note indicates additional, significant information that is provided with someprocedures.

26

Introduction

CAUTION

We use the term CAUTION to inform you about situations that could
result in serious damage to the instrument or other equipment. Details
about these circumstances are in a box like this one.

D

Caution (Achtung)Bedeutet, daß die genannte Anleitung genau befolgt werden muß, um
einen Geräteschaden zu vermeiden.

DK

Caution (Bemærk)Dette betyder, at den nævnte vejledning skal overholdes nøje for atundgå en beskadigelse af apparatet.

E

Caution (Advertencia)
Utilizamos el término CAUTION (ADVERTENCIA) para advertir sobre
situaciones que pueden provocar averías graves en este equipo o en
otros. En recuadros éste se proporciona información sobre este tipo decircunstancias.

F

Caution (Attention)
Nous utilisons le terme CAUTION (ATTENTION) pour signaler lessituations susceptibles de provoquer de graves détériorations del'instrument ou d'autre matériel. Les détails sur ces circonstances
figurent dans un encadré semblable à celui-ci.

I

Caution (Attenzione)
Con il termine CAUTION (ATTENZIONE) vengono segnalate situazioni
che potrebbero arrecare gravi danni allo strumento o ad altra
apparecchiatura. Troverete informazioni su tali circostanze in un
riquadro come questo.

NL

Caution (Opgelet)
Betekent dat de genoemde handleiding nauwkeurig moet worden
opgevolgd, om beschadiging van het instrument te voorkomen.

P

Caution (Atenção)Significa que a instrução referida tem de ser respeitada para evitar adanificação do aparelho.

27Explorer Operator Manual

We use the term WARNING to inform you about situations that could
result in personal injury to yourself or other persons. Details about
these circumstances are in a box like this one.
WARNING

28

D

Warning (Warnung)Bedeutet, daß es bei Nichtbeachten der genannten Anweisung zu einer
Verletzung des Benutzers kommen kann.

DK

Warning (Advarsel)
Betyder, at brugeren kan blive kvæstet, hvis anvisningen ikke
overholdes.

E

Warning (Peligro)
Utilizamos el término WARNING (PELIGRO) para informarle sobre
situaciones que pueden provocar daños personales a usted o a otras
personas. En los recuadros como éste se proporciona información sobre
este tipo de circunstancias.

F

Warning (Danger)
Nous utilisons la formule WARNING (DANGER) pour avertir dessituations pouvant occasionner des dommages corporels à l'utilisateurou à d'autres personnes. Les détails sur ces circonstances sont données
dans un encadré semblable à celui-ci.

I

Warning (Pericolo)
Con il termine WARNING (PERICOLO) vengono segnalate situazioni
che potrebbero provocare incidenti alle persone. Troverete informazioni
su tali circostanze in un riquadro come questo.

NL

Warning (Waarschuwing)
Betekent dat, wanneer de genoemde aanwijzing niet in acht wordt
genomen, dit kan leiden tot verwondingen van de gebruiker.

P

Warning (Aviso)
Significa que a não observância da instrução referida poderá causar um
ferimento ao usuário.

Introduction

A Brief Overview
Sampling Status
Indicator

Ready Status
Indicator

Alarm Status
Indicator

Injection
Port

Fixed KeysBatteryPack

PID Access
Hatch
ECD Access
Hatch

Connector for
Carrying Strap
and Harness

SampleInlet Port

SpeakerConnector for
Carrying Strap
and Harness

Soft Keys
Internal Cylinder
Contents Gauge
HandleVents

RS-232 Carrier Gas
Port
Purge Valve

Carrier Gas
Refill Port

Figure 1 Explorer Layout

Explorer is a portable, automatic gas analyzer for identifying airborne chemicals
and measuring their concentrations.
Explorer uses a gas chromatograph (GC) to analyze air samples, but you do notneed to understand the principles of chromatography to operate Explorer. Explorer
collects a sample of air and automatically introduces the sample into the GC.
Explorer manages the gas flows and timing during the analysis, and compares theoutcome of the analysis against the outcome of a previous analysis of a calibration
standard of known composition. Explorer then reports the analysis results on its
display, by compound name and concentration. Explorer alerts you with audible andvisual alarms if any of the detected chemical compounds have exceeded your alarmconcentration set points. Explorer stores the analysis results in its internal
datalogger.

29

Explorer Operator Manual

Explorer's GC uses the technique of precolumn backflushing to enable fast analysis
times. In order to analyze a wide range of different compounds, Explorer is fittedwith three separate analytical columns in its GC. It is not necessary for you tochange GC columns; column selection is automatic in Explorer. The columns areoperated at a controlled elevated temperature for precise identification ofcompounds.

30

Introduction

Unpacking and Checking PartsWARNING

Before unpacking the instrument, please read the Warnings and Safetysection of this User’s Guide. This section describes possible hazards
that might injure the user, damage the instrument, or compromise its
operation. Some general safety information is also provided.

The first time you unpack the Explorer you should check that the following
accessories are not missing or damaged, and if there is any problem,
contact INFICON immediately.
Explorer Operating Manual
SiteChart Software
User’s Reference Card
Communication Cable Kit
Carrying Strap
Tool Kit (pouch, multi-tool, and 2 hex keys)
Battery Pack
Carrier Gas Connection Kit
AC Adapter
Sample Inlet Filters (10 pieces)
Septa (10 pieces)
Factory Programmed Assay CD

31

Explorer Operator Manual

Battery Pack
Explorer uses a rechargeable nickel-metal hydride, rated for 300 charge/
discharge cycles, which is equivalent to a very heavy year of Explorer activity.
When the internal battery voltage is low, Explorer will display a low battery fault
and then after approximately 5 minutes, will shut itself off. This is a battery
protection measure, since deep discharging damages the battery. To resume
operation, connect Explorer to an AC power supply using the AC adapter or
replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
When the instrument is plugged into the AC adapter, the adapter will charge thebattery at a high rate. When the battery is fully charged the AC adapter will maintainthe full charge.
A fully charged standard battery pack will power Explorer for approximately 15
hours. This will depend on the oven temperature, whether or not the backlighting
is on or off and on the ambient conditions. An extended life battery pack will
provide approximately 6-8 hours of operation.
Before beginning operation of Explorer, the battery pack must be charged. You canconnect the battery charger to the battery pack while the battery pack is still
attached to Explorer.
You can also remove the battery pack and replace it with a fully charged, sparepack (951-402-G1) and charge the battery pack independently of the instrument.

Removing and Replacing the Battery Pack
Do not remove or recharge the battery pack in a hazardous location.

WARNING

32

Introduction

To remove the battery pack:
1. If the instrument has been turned on, turn it off by pressing the On/Off key andpressing YES.
2. Use the hex key from the Tool Kit (MX380334) to loosen the four captive
screws in the bottom of the battery pack.
3. Disconnect the battery pack from the instrument.
4. Replace the battery pack with a charged battery pack.
5. Clean the seal on Explorer and the rim of the battery pack of all dirt.
6. Align the connectors on the charged battery pack to the connectors at the rearof Explorer.
7. Secure the battery pack by tightening the 4 captive screws.
Do not over-tighten the screws.
Explorer
Battery Pack
Connectors

Captive Screws

Battery Pack
Seal

Figure 2 Removing Battery Pack

33

Explorer Operator Manual

Charging the Battery Pack
NOTE: Charging a fully discharged battery pack will take approximately 5 hours. Leaving
the adapter connected to a charged battery pack will not harm the battery or theadapter in any way. If a battery pack is to be left indefinitely, leave it connected tothe adapter so that it will be fully charged and ready for operation. On average, afully charged standard battery pack will provide 4-6 hours of continuous operation.
An extended life battery pack will provide approximately 6-8 hours of operation.
Battery life is shorter if the instrument is turned off and then on again repeatedly
and at extreme cold temperatures.
To charge the battery pack on the Instrument:
1. Ensure the correct plug is installed on the line cord of the AC adapter.
If it is not correct for the wall outlet in your area, then it must be replaced, as
detailed in The AC Adapter Line Cord on page 332.
2. Plug the adapter into the jack located on the instrument.
3. Plug the adapter into an AC outlet.
4. Switch on the power at the AC outlet.
The LED, on the instrument, indicates the charge state. Red indicates thebattery is being quick charged. Green indicates the battery is fully charged andready for use and is being trickle charged.
It is normal for a fully charged battery to indicate it is charging (red light) when
first plugged in. The LED will turn green as the battery charges. The LED is off
if the AC adapter is not connected to Explorer.
5. When the battery pack is fully charged, remove the adapter, first from the ACoutlet then from the battery pack.
To charge the battery pack independently of the instrument:
1. Remove the battery pack as outlined in Removing and Replacing the Battery
Pack on page 32.
2. Plug the adapter into the jack located on the battery pack.
34

Introduction

3. Plug the adapter into an AC outlet.
4. Switch on the power at the AC outlet.
The LED, on the instrument, indicates the charge state. Red indicates thebattery is being quick charged. Green indicates the battery is fully charged andready for use and is being trickle charged.
It is normal for a fully charged battery to indicate it is charging (red light) when
first plugged in. The LED will turn green as the battery charges. The LED is off
if the AC adapter is not connected to Explorer.
5. When the battery pack is fully charged remove the adapter, first from the ACoutlet then from the battery pack.
6. Install the battery pack back onto the instrument as required.

35

Explorer Operator Manual

Carrier Gas
It is advisable to obtain a large cylinder of carrier gas, from which Explorer canbe operated directly or from which the internal carrier gas cylinder can be refilled.
Carrier gas - Specify high purity nitrogen, containing less than 0.1 part per
million (ppm) of hydrocarbon contamination. Nitrogen of this quality isreferred to as Ultra High Purity and is available commercially. Specify a CGA
580 outlet on the tank.
Your assay may require air. Specify high purity air, containing less than
0.1 ppm of hydrocarbon contamination. Such air is usually referred to as Ultra
Zero, or Zero Zero grade and is available commercially. Specify a CGA 590
outlet on the tank.
NOTE: You must use nitrogen if you are using the ECD.
Carrier Gas Filling Station - MX380323 for nitrogen or MX380325 for air.
Carrier gas regulator - Specify a two stage, high purity regulator with a CGA
590 connection for air or, a CGA 580 connection for nitrogen. The regulator
should also have a 1/8”, parallel, compression fitting with which to connect
the regulator to Explorer. The delivery pressure must be adjustable to 100
psig
A stainless steel diaphragm regulator should be used as this will reduce thepotential for the carrier gas to be contaminated by the regulator itself.
The regulator must be absolutely clean and free from any oil or othercontamination. Teflon or stainless steel tubing should be used to connect
the regulator to Explorer.
NOTE: Never use vinyl or rubber tubing to connect the regulator to Explorer, as thesematerials will result in contamination of the system.

36

Introduction

Filling the Internal Cylinder
Do not refill the internal cylinder in a hazardous location.

WARNING
If Explorer is to be used in the field, the internal cylinder will supply the carriergas. The internal cylinder will provide approximately 8 hours of operation. The
exact duration will depend on the carrier gas flow rates.
NOTE: To avoid system contamination, do not allow the cylinder to empty completely.
To refill this cylinder, a carrier gas filling station (MX380323 for nitrogenor MX380325 for air) is required.

Do not attempt to fill the internal cylinder without a carrier gas filling
station.
WARNING
The carrier gas filling station consists of an adapter fitting with a left or right-handed
thread for cylinder attachment, a three-way valve and a flexible hose. The three-way
valve can be positioned to deliver gas from the cylinder through the flexible hose to
the refill port. Alternatively, the valve can be turned to release carrier gas held in thehose, after filling. A pressure release valve is provided for safety at the upper end of
the flexible hose. This is set at 1500 psig. A flow restrictor is also incorporated inline with the hose in order to limit the rate of escape of gas.

37

Explorer Operator Manual

Do not modify or disassemble the carrier gas filling station. If you haveany problems, the unit must be returned to INFICON for repair or
replacement.
WARNINGTo fill the internal cylinder:
1. Connect the filling station fitting to the gas cylinder.
You must specify a CGA 590, or CGA 580 when ordering the filling station.
3-way valve

Flow restrictor

Quick connect
Flexible hose

Relief valve

Figure 3 Carrier Gas Refill Adapters (CGA 590 and CGA 580)
2. Turn the filling station valve handle so that it points away from the cylinder.
3. Open the cylinder valve and check that there are no leaks.
4. Place Explorer on a sturdy flat surface within easy reach of the flexible filling
hose.

38

Introduction

5. Turn the filling station valve so that it points towards the cylinder.
A steady flow of gas will be heard escaping from the end of the flexible hose.
This serves to purge the hose of any impurities.
6. Return the filling station valve to point away from the cylinder.
7. Hold the knurled collar of the Explorer refill port and slide it down towards the
top panel.
8. Insert the fitting at the end of the flexible hose into the refill port until it seatsagainst the port.
You will hear a click.
9. Release the knurled collar and allow it to slide up to its original position.
10. Turn the filling station valve so that it once again points towards the cylinder
and watch the pressure increase on the cylinder contents gauge on
Explorer’s side panel.
Do not leave Explorer unattended while filling the internal cylinder.

WARNINGNOTE: When the cylinder contents indicates approximately 1500 psig, the pressure relief
valve on the filling station will begin venting and prevent any further increase. The
contents pressure indicated MUST NOT exceed 1800 psig and the 3-way valve
should be switched before this occurs.
11. Turn the filling station valve handle to point away from the cylinder to allow
high pressure gas trapped in the flexible hose to escape.
A check valve in Explorer prevents gas in the cylinder from escaping.
12. Close the gas cylinder valve.

39Explorer Operator Manual

13. After relieving the gas pressure in the hose, remove it from the refill port bypulling the knurled collar down and extracting the fitting.
14. If the cylinder was empty, you will need to flush it through by emptying it
again, see Purging the Internal Carrier Gas Cylinder on page 253, and thenfilling it again

Connecting Carrier Gas
Explorer may be connected to an air or nitrogen cylinder for continuous operation.
A two-stage, high purity regulator capable of delivering 100 psig is required. Use
the carrier gas connection kit (MX380309)
1. Connect compression fittings to both ends of a length of the 1/8” Teflon tubing.
2. Set the external carrier delivery pressure to 100 psig (690 kPa).
3. Purge the Teflon tube to remove any contamination.
4. Plug the Quick Connect into the refill port on Explorer.
A continuous pressure of carrier gas must be maintained, even when the
instrument is not in use. This ensures Explorer is ready for use at short noticeand prevents column contamination.
NOTE: The internal cylinder will empty until it is at the same pressure as the pressure being
delivered from the tank. The contents gauge may show 0 psi when Explorer
is operated from an external cylinder.

40

Introduction

Connecting Accessories
Personal Computer running SiteChart Software
In order to utilize all of Explorer’s features you will need to use the SiteChart
software. To do this you must connect Explorer to a compatible PC and set up the
instrument from the PC. Complete specifications for the required PC and details
on connecting the PC to Explorer are covered in SiteChart Software starting on
page 99.

DC Power Cord
Explorer can be connected to a car battery through the cigarette lighter with the DC
power cord (MX380313).
NOTE: If the car is running you must ensure the car exhaust does not interfere with thesamples.
Do not connect the DC power cord to Explorer in hazardous locations.

WARNING
1. Turn the instrument off.
2. Connect the DC power cord (MX380313) to Explorer AC adapter port.
3. Connect the other end of the DC power cord to the cigarette lighter in the car.
4. Turn the instrument on again.
NOTE: For extended operation, you should use a fully charged battery pack 951-402-G1.

41

Explorer Operator Manual

Carrying Strap
Use the carrying strap (Part No. MX380308) for field operation to facilitate singlehanded operation.
1. Snap one end of the carrying strap to one connector on Explorer
has four connection points for the carrying strap.
2. Snap the other end of the carrying strap to another of the connectors on the
instrument.
The connection point is selectable to suit your application.
3. Adjust the shoulder pad and strap length for comfort.

42

Introduction

Telescoping Sample Probe
A two and a half meter (8'), telescoping, extension probe (MX380311) may beconnected to the Explorer sample in port for remote sampling. The probe can bemounted to the side of the instrument to facilitate portable operation.

Do not connect the mounting clips to Explorer in hazardous locations.

WARNING
Connecting the Probe

Place Probe
Clips HereFigure 4 Placement of Plastic Probe Clips
1. Remove the screw located below the carrier gas contents gauge.

43Explorer Operator Manual

2. Install the plastic clip to Explorer using one of the screws provided with theprobe.
3. Remove the middle screw and install the clip.
Keep the screws that you removed in the sample probe bag.
4. Tighten the screws down to ensure the Explorer case is securely closed.
5. Connect the probe to Explorer's sample in port. Use the compression fitting
supplied with the probe.
Using the ProbeTo extend the probe, loosen the knurled nut at the top of the wand, pull theextension out and then tighten the knurled nut to lock the extension in place.
To lengthen the probe further, loosen the lower knurled nut, pull the second
extension out and then tighten the knurled nut to lock the extension in place.
To reduce the probe, loosen both knurled nuts and push the extensions backinto the probe, then tighten the knurled nuts down to lock the extensions inplace.

When using the telescoping sample probe, NEVER aspirate liquids orsolids as they will damage the instrument.
CAUTION

Removing the Probe
1. Turn Explorer off.
2. Disconnect the probe from Explorer's sample in port.
3. Remove the mounting clips.

44

Introduction

4. Replace the original screws in Explorer's case.
5. Tighten the screws down to ensure the Explorer case is securely closed.
Do not over tighten these screws.
Connecting the Filter to the Telescoping Sample Probe
You can install a filter on the end of the probe to ensure liquids and solid materials
are not aspirated into the telescoping sample probe and then to the instrument.
1. The filter connector (MX380340) connects the filter to the inlet tubing of theprobe. The connector has a 3/16” port for the inlet tubing of the probe and a
1/4” port for the filter. Press the inlet tubing of the probe into the connector
until it is locked in place.
2. Press the narrower end of the filter into the other end of the connector until thefilter is locked in place.
Replacing the Filter
The filter will remove airborne particulates for up to 4 hours. The operating
environment will determine the exact time. The pump will sound labored when thefilter requires replacement.
1. Press the narrow collar on the connector in, toward the connector.
This will release the filter. If you cannot depress the collar with your finger
then use the multi-tool to depress the collar.
2. Remove the used filter.

45

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Insert the new filter (MX380339) into the collar until the filter is locked inplace.
When the filter is not in use, place it in its plastic bag and store it in a clean, dry
place.

Three Meter Sample LineFor remote sampling or for sampling a location that is difficult to reach, use
the three meter (10') sample line (MX380305).
1. Connect the three meter sample line to Explorer's sample in port.
2. Place the other end of the sample line at the sampling location.

When using the telescoping sample probe, NEVER aspirate liquids orsolids as they will damage the instrument.
CAUTION46

Introduction

Field Check List
The following items should be carried into the field to reduce or eliminate
instrument down time. If you will be in the field for a single 8-10 hour day, you
should include the following accessories:
Description
Battery pack (spare)
Calibration gas tank
Regulator to fit calibration gas tank
Carrier Gas Connection Kit
Field or Calibration kit(s)Carrying strap
DC adapter
Extension sample probe filter (10)Calibration Kit
Sample inlet filter (25)Septa (spare)
Septum capped vials
Syringe
Telescoping sample probe
Three meter sample line
Tool kit
Transit caseOperaing Manual
UV lamp (spare)
UV lamp window cleaning kit

Part No.
951-402-G1
Not applicableNot applicable
MX380309
MX380318, MX380348,
MX380358, MX380337, andMX380338
MX380308
MX380313
MX380339
MX380337
MX396015
MX380320
MX600630
60063101
MX380311
MX380305
MX380334
MX380316
MX380301
MX380029
MX380336

47

Explorer Operator Manual

If you will be in the field for more than one day you may want to include thefollowing additional items:

48

Description
AC adapter

Part No.
MX380302

Carrier gas and filling station
PC and associated cables
Communication cable kit
SiteChart software

MX380323 or MX380325
Not applicable
MX380304
MX380344

Introduction

Storing Explorer
When storing Explorer, the following conditions must be maintained:
You must maintain a flow of carrier gas through the columns to prevent
contamination. Fill the internal cylinder or connect an external supply of carriergas.
Do not allow the internal cylinder to empty completely. The internal cylinder
and the columns will become contaminated.
If the internal cylinder is completely empty when you come to use the Explorer
you must first purge the internal carrier gas cylinder, see page 266, and thenflush the column after filling the instrument with carrier gas. Allow the
instrument to warm up for 30 minutes. Monitor the offset level as displayed on
the status screen and wait until it has stabilized before attempting to use theinstrument. An instrument that is cleaning out, will show an unstable anddropping baseline. Typical offset is in the range 200-800 mV and anythingover 800 mV indicates contamination.
Store Explorer in a location that is free of volatile organic vapors and gases.
The ambient temperature must be above 0 C (32 F) and below 40 C
(105 F).
If the battery pack has been discharged, connect the instrument to the AC
adapter and recharge the battery.
Your operating requirements will determine the method that you use to store
Explorer. The following sections list Explorer availability and the preferred
method of storage.

49Explorer Operator Manual

Immediate Availability
If you use Explorer every day, you will most likely want the instrument ready to use
immediately. If you do not use the instrument regularly, but still require immediate
availability then you must store the instrument as described below.
Leave Explorer turned on.
Calibrate once every 24 hours.
Calibration should be performed before beginning operation of Explorer,
as noted in Calibration on page 210.
Connect the instrument to a carrier gas cylinder, or refill the carrier gas
cylinder every 6 - 8 hours.
Connect the instrument to the AC adapter when not is use.

Availability Within 30 Minutes
If you use Explorer less frequently, you may want to use the following procedure forstoring the instrument. This procedure allows you to store the instrument up to 5
days. When you are ready to use Explorer, allow approximately 30 minutes for the
instrument to warm up. Better analysis result may be obtained if you allow the
instrument to warm up for 1-2 hours.
Turn Explorer off.
Connect the instrument to an external cylinder of carrier gas.
Connect the instrument to the AC adapter.
When you are ready to use Explorer, turn it on and allow 30 minutes forthe instrument to warm up and stabilize. When all faults have cleared,
calibrate Explorer for your application.

50

Introduction

Availability Within 12 Hours
To store the instrument for extended periods use the following procedure. When you
are ready to use the instrument, allow approximately 12 hours for the instrument tostabilize.
Turn Explorer off.
Connect the instrument to the AC adapter.
When you are ready to use Explorer, turn it on and leave at least 12 hours forthe instrument to stabilize. Allow the column to flush overnight until theoffset level returns to 200-800 mV.

51

Using Explorer

3

Using Explorer

Introduction
This chapter discusses basic operation of Explorer is a menu based system. Fourmenus contain all the functions to control the operation of the instrument.
By working through this chapter, you will familiarize yourself with the basic
operation of the instrument.

User and Supervisor Modes
In order to customize the user interface for both simplified field operation and at
the same time retain the powerful chromatographic features, Explorer supports twomodes of operation: user mode and supervisor mode.
In user mode, some of the more advanced features are hidden. This simplifies
operation of the instrument for field use.
In supervisor mode, all the user mode commands are available and advanced method
development features are accessible.
A password is required to change from user mode to supervisor mode. The password
is factory set to 12344321 and cannot be changed.

Fixed Keys
The four keys, located to the left of the display, each have a fixed function and arecalled the fixed keys. The top key is the On/Off key, the next key is Start Stop, thethird key is Enter Menu and the bottom key is Exit.
The On/Off key is used to turn Explorer power on and off. You will beprompted before the instrument shuts down to prevent accidental poweroff.
The Start Stop key starts or stops a GC or TVOC analysis.

53

Explorer Operator Manual

The Enter Menu key has a context sensitive function. When you arenavigating through the function map, press the Enter Menu key to exit thefunction map and remove the menu from the display. When entering data,
Enter Menu is used to confirm the entry.
The Exit key provides a way of returning to a previous display or exiting thefunction map completely. Press the Exit key to move back through the function
map.

Soft Keys
The four keys, located directly below the display, each have varying functions
depending on the menu displayed. These soft keys are used for configuring
Explorer, editing the datalogger, and controlling the display. Since only four soft keys
are available, each function is broken down into a path. Maps, showing each pathand the resulting functions, are shown in below.
GC Supervisor Mode - Library Key
LIBRARY

CAL
LIST

EDIT

CALCMPDCALCONC

ALARM
STORE

GC Supervisor Mode - Display KeyDISPLAY

GC

PEAK
CMPD
GRAPH

NORM
SCALE
REINT
SMOOTHDET
VOC
STATUSBCKLITE

54

Using Explorer

GC Supervisor Mode - Setup Key
SETUP

CLOCK

DATE
TIME

TAG
MODE

AUTO

ON/OFF
DELAY
RUNS
VOC-GCUSERINJECTSYRINGELOOPPROBECONFIGCOLUMNMETHOD

TIMINGPUMPINJECT
BKFLSHANLZMETHODSLOPESSLP UPSLP DWNFILTER

DELAY
AUTO
HEIGHTPRESSTEMPCOLUMN
ECD

AUDIO
SENSE

44

GC Supervisor Mode - Log Key
LOG

VIEW

NEXT
PREV
DISPLAY

PEAK
CMPD
GRAPH

DELETE

CURRENT
RANGE
ALL

PRINT

55

Explorer Operator Manual

TVOC Supervisor Mode - all keys

For all information that you must enter, the soft keys correspond to the up, down,
left, and right arrow.

56

Using Explorer

The up and down arrows are used to edit the character highlighted by the cursor. The
right arrow is used to advance the cursor to the next character on the right. When the
cursor is advanced to the right most character, it stops. The left arrow is used toadvance the cursor to the previous character on the left. When the cursor is advanced
to the left most character, it stops.
To accept the changes, press the Enter Menu key. To ignore the changes, press the
Exit key.

Indicator LEDs
The indicator LEDs visually indicate Explorer’s status:
The Ready LED is lit when the run is complete, and Explorer is ready forthe next sample.
The Sampling LED indicates that a sample is currently in the column.
The Alarm LED is lit when one or more compounds in the last analysis
exceeds the preset alarm level.

57

Explorer Operator Manual

Beginning Operation
1. Before beginning operation of the instrument, you must fill the internal
cylinder with carrier gas or connect the instrument to an external supply of
carrier gas. See Carrier Gas starting on page 36.
2. Ensure the battery is charged or that the instrument is connected to the AC
adapter.
3. Press the On/Off key.
The EPROM version and copyright notice will be displayed.
4. Press the up or down arrow to adjust the contrast, as required.
If the display is still hard to see, you can turn the backlighting on.
To use the Backlight:
1. Press the Enter Menu.
The soft keys will be shown along the bottom of the display.
2. Press the key below DISPLAY.
3. Press BCKLITE.
4. Press ON to turn the backlighting on.
5. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
NOTE: To extend the operating life of the battery pack, turn the backlighting off when it is
not required.

58̀

Using Explorer

Status LineThe top line of the display will always be the status line. When the instrument isidle, the instrument status, the date, time, sample inlet and detector are displayed.
One of four sampling options will be displayed:
Sampling Method

Status Line CodeLoop Injection

LP

Long Sample Probe

PRB

Extended Sample Probe

PRB

Syringe Injection

SYR

If a fault occurs, the top line of the display will alternate between the fault message
and the status line.
When Explorer is performing a run the status line will display the instrument status,
an analysis timer, the current column, the run # and detector.
If you are reviewing logged data, the status line will display the time and date theanalysis was run. This information will alternate with the column and run #.
Instrument Status

Description

Alarm

Alarm condition on last run

SampleThe pump is drawing a sample

Analyze

Analysis in progress

Ready

Ready to start an analysis

59

Explorer Operator Manual

Instrument Status

60

Description

PowerDn

Lamp turned off due to pressure fault

Over Range

Signal was over range on the last run.

TuningThe UV lamp is being started

Wait

Displayed at the delay time during
auto-cycling

Fault: Log Full

Datalogger is fullFault: Low Batt

Battery condition is low

Fault: Lamp

Lamp intensity failure

Fault: Oven Not Ready

Oven not within +/- 1° of the set point

Fault: Pressure

Carrier pressure is low

Fault: Calibration

Bad calibration run

Using Explorer

Setting the Date and TimeThe Clock key is used to set both the current date and time.
1. Press Enter Menu.
2. Press the SETUP key.
Each time you press a soft key, the soft key names change.
3. Press CLOCK.
4. Press TIME.
5. Use the arrow keys to enter the correct time.
The time is formatted as Hour:Minute:Second.
The up and down arrows are used to edit the character underlined by the cursor.
The right arrow is used to advance the cursor to the next character on the right.
Formatting characters, such as the colon (:) in the time and the slash (/) in thedate are skipped when advancing the cursor.
6. Press Enter Menu to confirm the time and then press DATE.
7. Use the arrow keys to enter the correct date.
When setting the date, format as Year/Month/Day.
8. Press Enter Menu to confirm the date.
9. Press Enter Menu again to close the menu.

61

Explorer Operator Manual

Reviewing the Instrument Status
The status screen provides the current operating parameters. You cannot alter any
parameters in the status screen. Each parameter is listed below with a brief
description:
Description

Parameter

62

PID Signal

The current signal from the photoionization detector.

PID Offset

The voltage applied to keep the baseline at 10% of full scale.
The applied offset is an indication of column contamination. If
the offset is greater than 800 mV the column should be allowed
to flush until it stabilizes at a value between 200 and 800 mV.

PID UV Int

The intensity of the lamp. The intensity is measured by aphotocell and converted to a voltage. The lamp is tuned toapproximately 75% of its maximum intensity and maintainedat this intensity.

PID Status

Shows whether the lamp is on or off.

PID Temp

The operating temperature of the photoionization detector.

Column Temp

The current temperature of the selected column.

Ambient Temp

The temperature as measured by a sensor inside Explorer.

Pressure

The column head pressure.

Active Column

The column selected for the current analysis.

Log Capacity

The amount of space remaining in the datalogger.

Battery

The battery voltage.

Using Explorer

Parameter

Description

Charge State

If the instrument is connected to the AC adapter the charge
state will be Fast if the battery pack is being charged or Trickle
if the battery pack is being maintained at full charge. If the
instrument is operating from the battery pack alone then the
charge state will be Off.

Serial #The serial number of the instrument.

Cycle Time

This timer shows the time remaining in the current analysis. If
a run is not in progress, then this parameter is set to 0.

If the ECD is selected for operation, then parameters specific to the ECD will be
displayed.
To change the view from the PID to the ECD:
1. Press DISPLAY, then STATUS, then GC, then DET.
2. When prompted to change views to the ECD, press Enter Menu.
Parameter

Description

ECD Signal

The current signal from the electron capture detector.

ECD Offset

The voltage applied to keep the baseline at 10% of fullscale. The
applied offset is an indication of column contamination. If theoffset is greater than 800 mV the column should be allowed toflush until it stabilizes at a value between 200 and 800 mV.

ECD Status

Shows that the ECD is on or off.

ECD Temp

The operating temperature of the electron capture detector. The
temperature can be set independently of the column and PID.

63

Explorer Operator Manual

Display Options
Switch between display options by pressing Enter Menu and then DISPLAY
and GC.
PEAK will list all the peaks in the current or last analysis. If a peak matches alibrary compound it will be identified. If the retention time does not correspondto a library compound it will be listed as Unknown.
CMPD (Compound) lists all the compounds in the current library. If thecompound is present in the current or last analysis, a concentration and statuswill be listed beside the compound.
GRAPH shows the chromatogram as it develops. As peaks appear and are
integrated they are numbered. You can normalize the chromatogram or viewthe full scale.
DET is used when an ECD is installed, and switches to display the output fromthe second detector. If you have selected both PID and ECD operation then you
can use this option to switch between views.
To normalize the graph press Enter Menu, DISPLAY, GC, GRAPH andNORM.
This will adjust the scale so that full scale is the top of the largest peak.
Selecting SCALE will return to the display to the full range of 0-2500 mV athigh sensitivity or 0-252 mV at low sensitivity.
Compound Status Codes

64

Code

Description

OK

Detected concentration is within acceptable concentration limits.

A1

Exceeded alarm concentration

C

Displayed when you have used the run for calibration. Indicatesthat the compound was used for calibration.

Using Explorer

Code

Description

CR

Indicates a compound that was present in the library but notcontained in the calibration gas. This method of calibration may
lead to an invalid calibration and is intended for specialized
applications only. Please contact INFICON
Applications Department for more details.

CF

This compound was selected for calibration but was not present
in the calibration gas. A calibration fault was encountered duringcalibration.

OV

The peak has gone over range. The peak will be extrapolated
based on where the signal went off scale and where it returned.
The displayed concentration will be derived from theextrapolated peak area.

65

Explorer Operator ManualEntering a Tag
A tag may be used to identify certain sampling location or a certain sample in the
datalogger. You can enter a tag to indicate a change of location or a change inpersonnel.
To enter a tag:
1. Press Enter Menu then SETUP and TAG.
2. Use the arrow keys to enter a name or number.
The tag can use up to 10 characters.
3. Press Enter Menu to confirm the tag.
4. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
The tag you enter here will identify both GC and TVOC analyses. You canenter a new tag for every analysis or you can enter a single tag for a group of
analyses.
A pop up box will prompt you to enter a tag when you begin the first run after
the instrument has been turned on.

66

Using Explorer

Audio Options
Alarm Audio
If any of the identified peak concentrations exceed the alarm level, stored in thelibrary, then the audible alarm may sound at the end of the analysis.
You have three options for the audio alarm. You can turn it off and there will be no
audible indicator if an alarm occurs. Turn the audio off if you are auto-analyzingor if you are controlling Explorer from a remote location through SiteChart. You
can turn the audio alarm on, so an audible alarm will sound until the alarm is
acknowledged. You can also set the alarm to sound momentarily and then shut off.
To change the audio option:
1. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, CONFIG, and AUDIO.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the desired option from the Set Audio box andpress Enter Menu to confirm your selection.
3. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.

Injection Audio
You can configure Explorer to sound an audible indicator when the sample isinjected onto the column. This injection beep is most useful for syringe
injections.
1. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE, and INJECT.
2. Press the speaker icon.
3. Use the arrow keys to select off and press Enter Menu and then Exit.

67

Explorer Operator Manual

Loop Injection Analysis
The instrument will be set up according to the method loaded on your instrument.
You can use a PC and the SiteChart software to load another method.

Selecting the Injection Method
Explorer can accept both manual syringe and automatic sample loop injections. You
must calibrate using the same injection technique as your sample. If you are using
automatic loop injection for sampling, calibrate using loop injection. If you are using
syringe injection for sampling, calibrate using syringe injection.
To select the injection method:
1. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE, and INJECT.
2. Press LOOP and press Enter Menu to set the option and to close the menu.
The sampling method will be indicated in the status line as LP to indicate aloop injection or PRB to indicate a loop injection through either the long probe
or the extended probe.

Performing a Loop Injection Analysis
1. Ensure carrier gas is supplied to the instrument.
2. Ensure the plugs have been removed from the following ports: Detector 1 and 2
out, pump out and vent out.
3. Monitor the offset level in the status display box.
If it is above 800 mV or if the offset level is falling, allow the instrument tostabilize for about an hour. If this does not bring the signal down, flush thecolumn for a few hours or overnight, as described in Flushing the Columns
starting on page 250.

68

Using Explorer

NOTE: If you are using the ECD, you will also need to monitor the ECD offset level. PressDISPLAY, STATUS, GC, and DET. When prompted to change views to the ECD,
press Enter Menu. Monitor the offset level in the status display box. If it is above
800 mV or if the offset level is falling, allow the instrument to stabilize for about anhour. If this does not bring the signal down, flush the column for a few hours orovernight.
4. Disable automatic analyzing by pressing Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE,
AUTO, and ON/OFF. Use the arrow keys to select Off and then press Enter
Menu. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
5. During a loop injection, Explorer will draw a sample through the sample inport. Connect a gas bag containing some calibration gas to the sample in port.
A gas bag is included in the Field or Calibration Kit (MX380318, MX380348,
MX380338, MX380358, and MX380337)
6. Once the bag is connected, press Start Stop. If prompted to enter an analysis
tag, press YES and use the arrow keys to enter TEST. Press Enter Menu toconfirm the entry and start the analysis.
When the analysis starts, a message will be displayed indicating which column
and detector will be used. You will hear a beep when the sample is injected on
to the column.
The status line will now show a timer, a run number, the column and detector
in use. If you are in peak display, peaks will be added to the list as they areintegrated. If you are in compound display, concentrations of detected peaks
will be updated at the end of the analysis. In graph display, you can see thechromatogram developing. Another line displays the fullscale range and theanalysis time.
Peaks are identified depending on what information is in the current library. If anyof the identified peak concentrations exceed the alarm level, stored in the library,then the audible alarm may sound at the end of the analysis.
If an alarm is encountered, an alarm acknowledge box will open, press YES to
acknowledge the alarm condition and to silence the audible alarm.
69

Explorer Operator Manual

Setting Probe Length
If you are doing a loop injection you can choose one of two sample probes or noprobe at all.
NOTE: If you are using the long probe or the extended probe you must allow for a longer
pump time so that the sample can be drawn through the sampling probe. The pumptime is set automatically when you select the probe.
To set the probe length:
1. Press Enter Menu then SETUP, MODE, and INJECT.
2. Press PROBE and use the up and down arrow keys to select the desired probe.
Select short if you are not using a probe or if you are using the gas bag adapter.
The long sample line is 3 meters (m) long. The telescoping extended sample
probe is 5 m long and has a telescoping handle.
3. Press Enter Menu to confirm your selection, press Exit to close the box andreturn to the menu, and press Enter Menu to close the menu.

70

Using Explorer

Performing a Syringe Injection Analysis
Selecting the Injection Method
Explorer can accept both manual syringe and automatic sample loop injections. You
must calibrate using the same injection technique as your sample. If you are using
automatic loop injection for sampling, calibrate using loop injection. If you are using
syringe injection for sampling, calibrate using syringe injection.
To select the injection method:
1. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE, and INJECT.
2. Press SYRINGE and press Enter Menu to set the option and to close themenu.
The sampling method will be indicated in the status line as SYR.

Performing a Syringe Injection Analysis
1. Ensure carrier gas is supplied to the instrument.
2. Ensure the plugs have been removed from the following ports: Detector 1 and 2
out, pump out and vent out.
3. Monitor the offset level in the status display box.
If it is above 800 mV or if the offset level is falling, allow the instrument tostabilize for about an hour. If this does not bring the signal down, flush thecolumn for a few hours or overnight, as described in Flushing the Columns
starting on page 250.
NOTE: If you are using the ECD, you will also need to monitor the ECD offset level. PressDISPLAY, STATUS, GC, and DET. When prompted to change views to the ECD,
press Enter Menu. Monitor the offset level in the status display box. If it is above
800 mV or if the offset level is falling, allow the instrument to stabilize for about anhour. If this does not bring the signal down, flush the column for a few hours orovernight.

71

Explorer Operator Manual

4. Disable automatic analyzing by pressing Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE,
AUTO, and ON/OFF. Use the arrow keys to select Off and then press Enter
Menu. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
5. Flush a 100 uL syringe with sample and then draw a 100 uL sample.

Only inject gas samples into the Explorer. Injection of liquid or
solid samples will damage the Explorer.
CAUTION6. When the syringe is ready press Start Stop. If prompted to enter an analysis
tag, press YES and use the arrow keys to enter TEST. Press Enter Menu toconfirm the entry and start the analysis.
7. The amount of time to make the injection will depend on the pump time set
during method development.
A count down timer in the status line will show the time for you to prepare forthe injection.
8. Guide the syringe needle through the hole in the injection port until the needle
point touches the septum, but do not pierce the septum or depress the plunger.
9. After the beep, push the needle though the septum until the barrel comes up
against the injection port and immediately depress the plunger.
Depressing the plunger must be a rapid movement.

72

Using Explorer

10. Leave the syringe in place for about 2 seconds then withdraw it.
When the analysis starts, a message will be displayed indicating which column
and detector are in use.
The status line will now show a timer, a run number, the column and detector
in use. If you are in peak display, peaks will be added to the list as they areintegrated. If you are in compound display, concentrations of detected peaks
will be updated at the end of the analysis. In graph display, you can see thechromatogram developing. Another line displays the fullscale range and theanalysis time.
The manual injection technique described above will give varying results at first.
Practice making manual injections until the results can be reproduced to within 5%of the integrated peak area.
Peaks are identified depending on the information in the current library. If any of theidentified peak concentrations exceed the alarm level, stored in the library, then the
audible alarm may sound at the end of the analysis.
If an alarm sounds, an alarm acknowledge box will open. Press YES to
acknowledge the alarm condition and to silence the audible alarm.
NOTE: While an analysis is in progress it is not possible to change to TVOC mode. Wait
until the current analysis is complete before attempting to change modes.
To stop the analysis before it is complete, press the Start Stop key.
If you stopped the analysis after the sample was injected onto the column you
must wait for the duration of the analysis time for the column to be flushed
before beginning another analysis on the same column, otherwise carry-over
my result. When you stop an analysis, Explorer will begin to flush thecolumn and move to the next column. When you press Start Stop, theanalysis will begin on the next column.
NOTE: If you are using syringe injection, you must calibrate Explorer using syringe
injection.

73

Explorer Operator Manual

Automatic Operation
Automatic operation allows you to set up Explorer to sample unattended. If morethan one column is required to complete an analysis, then each column will besampled in order. If each column has different chromatographic settings,
Explorer will adjust its settings between analyses. You can also configure theinstrument to perform a preset number of analyses. You must use loop injections
for automatic analyzing.
1. Ensure the battery is fully charged or connect the instrument to the AC adapter,as discussed in Battery Pack on page 32.
2. Fill the carrier gas cylinder or connect the instrument to a tank of carrier gas as
discussed in Carrier Gas on page 36.
3. Calibrate the instrument before beginning automatic operation, see Calibration
starting on page 210 for calibration procedures.
4. If you are running continuously then clear the datalogger.
OR
If you are running a preset number of analyses you can clear the datalogger orensure there is enough free space for the number of analyses you are about torun.
5. Press Enter Menu, then DISPLAY, GC and GRAPH.
If you prefer, select a different display option.
You will now setup Explorer to perform GC analyses.
6. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE, AUTO.
7. Press DELAY and use the arrow keys to enter a delay time.
This is the time between runs.
8. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry and close the box.

74

Using Explorer

9. Press RUN and use the arrow keys to enter the number of analyses required.
If your method requires all three columns and you need 2 complete analyses,
enter 6. After 6 runs, 2 on each column, Explorer will turn automatic analyzing
off. If you want the instrument to sample continuously enter 0.
Zero is the default value.
10. Set a minimum of 1 minute delay between runs to enable Explorer to stabilize
the baseline between runs.
11. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry and close the box.
12. Press ON/OFF (the soft key) and use the arrow keys to select On and then press
Enter Menu to confirm the selection.
13. Press Exit to close the box.
Explorer will begin a run on Column A, B orC.
Explorer will now run continuously until it has performed 6 runs. If you have set
the instrument to run continuously it will run until it encounters a critical fault suchas a lamp failure, low battery or carrier gas pressure fault.
NOTE: If you want to begin analyzing on a certain column you must press Start Stop to
begin an analysis and then press Start Stop again to stop the analysis and move tothe next column. For example if the last analysis was performed on Column B andyou want to start automatic analyzing on Column A, press Start Stop. The run
begins on Column C. Press Start Stop before the pump stops. This will abort the run
before the injection is made onto Column C and prepare for the next run on
Column A.

75

Explorer Operator Manual

TVOC Analysis
You can use the TVOC mode to screen a sample for total volatile organic
compounds. If a preset alarm is exceeded you can then use the GC to determine
which compounds are present. A TVOC sample may be injected by syringe or you
may use loop injection. The injection is directed to Column V. Column V is a blankcolumn. The sample passes through the column, without separating, and into thedetector.
NOTE: A TVOC analysis is sent through the PID only. You cannot obtain a TVOC run
through the ECD.

TVOC Method
You configure Explorer for a TVOC run in the same manner as you would for a
GC run. The methods you receive on the assays disk will not normally contain amethod for TVOC operation. You can use the same settings as the GC or you canconfigure the TVOC for the shortest possible analysis time.
1. Press Enter Menu, then DISPLAY, VOC and REPORT (or GRAPH).
2. Check the status line to ensure you are set up for the correct type of injection.
A status of LP indicates a loop injection. PRB indicates a loop injection using
the long or extended probe. If SYR are shown on that status line, Explorer is
expecting a syringe injection. Refer to Selecting the Injection Method on page78 or 81 if you need to change it.
3. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, TIMING and PUMP.
4. Enter a pump time and press Enter Menu.
5. Press INJECT and enter the injection time.

76

Using Explorer

6. Press BKFLSH and enter the backflush time.
In TVOC operation the backflush time is only used for syringe injections.
Backflushing and can reduce peak tailing due to the injection port.
Backflushing of the injection port begins at the backflush time.
The sample will clear the column in approximately 30 seconds, The exact time
will depend on the pressure and resulting column flow rate. You must thenbackflush the column to ensure any sample residue is removed from thechromatographic system. Set the back flush time to equal the retention time of
the unretained sample.
7. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry.
8. Press ANLZ and enter the analysis time.
An analysis time of 60 seconds can be used for most applications. If you areusing syringe injection, set the analysis time so that it includes the sample
transit time (retention time) and the backflush time. If the sample clears thecolumn in 30 seconds, then the backflush time has also been set to 30 seconds
and the resulting analysis time will be 60 seconds (30+30).
9. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry.
10. Press Exit and then PRESS and enter a pressure setting.
Set the pressure to the same value used in your GC method to reduce the time
between runs.
If necessary you can operate the TVOC at 14 psi. This will increase sensitivity
and reduce the TVOC analysis time allowing faster TVOC cycling. If the
TVOC and GC methods contain different pressure settings, Explorer muststabilize for 20-30 minutes between runs. You may lose any time gained byincreasing the TVOC pressure.
11. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry.
12. Press Exit then press SENSE and enter the desired detector sensitivity.
13. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry and then press Exit.
NOTE: The column temperature will be set by the GC method for last active column.

77

Explorer Operator Manual

Performing a TVOC Run
1. Press Enter Menu, then DISPLAY, VOC and REPORT (or GRAPH).
2. Press Start Stop.
The analysis will start and a box indicating a run on Column V (the VOC
column) will be displayed.
NOTE: If you are performing a syringe injection, make sure Explorer is configured for asyringe injection and prepare the syringe sample before you press Start Stop. The
analysis will start and you will have 10 seconds to make the injection. A count down
timer in the status line will show the time for you to prepare for the injection. Guide
the syringe needle through the hole in the injection port until the needle point
touches the septum, but do not pierce the septum or depress the plunger. After the
beep, push the needle though the septum until the barrel comes up against the
injection port and immediately depress the plunger. Depressing the plunger must be
a rapid movement.

Never inject liquid or solid samples into the Explorer, you will
damage the instrument.
CAUTION
NOTE: The number displayed is not a real time reading. The display value will be updated
at the end of the TVOC analysis. The status line now shows a timer, a run number,the column and detector in use. A bar showing the progression of the analysis isalso displayed. A status of “OK” is shown beside the numerical value. See Status
Line on page 59 for other possible status messages.

78

Using Explorer

3. Press Enter Menu, then DISPLAY, VOC and GRAPH.
Selecting GRAPH shows you a graph of response versus time. This is a realtime display. A single peak on the graph indicates the presence of VOCs. Ingraph display, another line of text displays the fullscale range and the analysistime.
At the end of the TVOC analysis, if any VOCs were present, the area of the
TVOC peak will be shown at the bottom of the Report display.
NOTE: If the detected concentration exceeds the alarm level, stored in the library, then the
audible alarm may sound at the end of the analysis. If an alarm sounds, an alarmacknowledge box will open. Press YES to acknowledge the alarm condition and tosilence the audible alarm.
NOTE: While an analysis is in progress it is not possible to change to GC mode. Wait until
the current analysis is complete before attempting to change modes.
To stop the analysis before it is complete, press the Start Stop key.
If you stopped the analysis after the sample was injected onto Column V, youmust wait for the duration of the analysis time for the column to be flushed
before beginning another analysis.

TVOC Automatic Operation
1. Ensure the battery is fully charged or connect the instrument to the AC adapter,as discussed in Battery Pack on page 32.
2. Fill the carrier gas cylinder or connect the instrument to a tank of carrier gas as
discussed in Carrier Gas on page 36.
3. Calibrate the instrument before beginning automatic operation, see Calibration
starting on page 210 for calibration procedures.

79Explorer Operator Manual

4. If you are running continuously then clear the datalogger.
OR
If you are running a preset number of analyses you can clear the datalogger orensure there is enough free space for the number of analyses you are about torun.
5. Press Enter Menu, then DISPLAY, VOC and GRAPH.
If you prefer, select the REPORT display option.
6. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE, and AUTO.
7. Press DELAY and use the arrow keys to enter a delay time.
This is the time between runs.
A minimum of 1 minute is required to allow the Explorer to stabilize thebaseline.
8. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry and close the box.
9. Press RUN and use the arrow keys to enter the number of analyses required.
If you want the instrument to sample continuously enter 0, which is the default
value.
10. Press Enter Menu to confirm the entry and close the box.
11. Press ON/OFF (the soft key) and use the arrow keys to select On and then press
Enter Menu.
12. Press Exit to close the box.
Explorer will begin a run on Column V.
Explorer will now run continuously until it has performed the preset number ofruns. If you have set the instrument to run continuously it will run until it
encounters a critical fault such as a lamp failure, low battery or carrier gas
pressure fault.

80

Using Explorer

Autostart GC on VOC Alarm
Explorer’s TVOC mode can be programmed to automatically start a GC
analysis when the VOC encounters an alarm condition, a feature that can beused for automated site monitoring.
You may set up Explorer to run automatically in TVOC mode. If it encounters aconcentration that exceeds a preset alarm level, it will run a GC analysis according
to the method that is loaded. It will then return to TVOC monitoring.
1. Calibrate the GC and the TVOC as outlined in Calibration starting on page210.
You just calibrate both the GC and the TVOC once every 8 hours of operation,
though some assays may require more frequent calibration, refer to the Assay
User’s Notes for details.
2. Press Enter Menu, then DISPLAY, VOC and REPORT (or GRAPH).
3. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY, and ALRM and enter the alarm level.
4. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, MODE, AUTO and VOC-GC and use thearrow keys to select On.
5. Press Enter Menu to confirm the selection.
6. Press Exit and DELAY, and enter a delay time.
This value must be greater than 1 minute.
7. Press Enter/Menu to confirm the value.
8. Press RUNS and enter the number of runs to be performed.
If you want the instrument to sample continuously enter zero, which is thedefault value.
9. Press Enter/Menu to confirm the value.
10. Press Exit and ON/OFF (the soft key), then use the arrow keys to select On.

81

Explorer Operator Manual

11. Press Enter Menu to confirm the selection.
12. Press Exit to close the box.
Explorer will begin a run on Column V.
Explorer will complete an analysis for each alarm condition encountered by the
TVOC. If the GC method consists of three runs, the GC will perform three runs
before returning to TVOC operation.

82

Using Explorer

Logged Data
The datalogger is always on, so that all analyses are logged. The datalogger willhold approximately 40 GC log entries, which is sufficient for an 8 hour day with one
run every 10 minutes. Every GC analysis recorded in the datalogger will include acomplete peak report and chromatogram.
To view the GC log the instrument must be in the GC mode. To view the TVOC log
the instrument must be in the TVOC mode. Since TVOC logs occupy less memory,
up to 255 TVOC entries can be stored. Both GC and TVOC logs share the same
memory resource. Each successful calibration also occupies a full GC memory
space.
The status line shows the log entry number and sample date and time. The column
and the run number will be shown on a second status line. The two lines of
information will alternate.

Review Logged Data
1. Press Enter Menu, DISPLAY.
2. Select GC to review GC analysesOR
VOC to review TVOC analyses.
3. Select the display you require.
If you are in GC mode, select PEAK, CMPD, or GRAPH.
If you are in TVOC mode, select REPORT or GRAPH.
4. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.

83Explorer Operator Manual

5. Press Enter Menu to re-open the menu and press LOG.
The display will show the most recent Log entry. If the last analysis iscomplete, it will be the same as the real time display. The display remains thesame as the selected display. If you are in peak display, the logged data will beshown in peak display.
6. Press VIEW to review the datalogger entries.
7. Press NEXT or PREV to move through the entries.
The status line shows the log entry number and the date and time the sample
was taken. Alternately, the column and the run number will be shown on thestatus line. The two lines of information will alternate.
NOTE: If you are reviewing GC data, you can change the display by pressing DISPLAY andselecting the desired display option. If you are reviewing TVOC data then you canchoose to display REPORT or GRAPH format.
8. Press Exit to return to the real time display.

Deleting Datalogger Entries
When the datalogger becomes full you must delete the contents. You can delete
selected datalogger entries using the delete option.
NOTE: You can connect Explorer to a PC and use the SiteChart software to store the logged
data, as detailed on page 128. It is strongly recommend that SiteChart is used todownload data from Explorer. The datalogger entries are saved in a folder
created on your PC and then deleted from the datalogger.
Deleting a single entry
1. Press Enter Menu, then LOG and VIEW.
2. Press NEXT or PREV to move through the entries and select the log entry to bedeleted.
Press Exit to go back one level on the menu tree.

84

Using Explorer

3. Press DELETE, CURRENT, CURRENT.
The selected entry will be removed from the datalogger.
Deleting a range of entries
1. Press Enter Menu, then LOG and VIEW.
2. Press DELETE and RANGE.
3. Use the arrow keys to enter the number of the start log entry and press EnterMenu.
4. Use the arrow keys to enter the number of the end log entry and press EnterMenu.
The selected range will be removed from the datalogger.
The remaining entries will be numbered sequentially.
Removing all the entries in the datalogger
1. Press Enter Menu, then LOG, DELETE and ALL.
You will be prompted to confirm that you want to delete all entries.
2. Press YES.
The data is deleted.

85

Explorer Operator Manual

Using the ECDWARNINGTo ensure that removable radioactive contamination on the external
parts of the ECD remains at a safe level, the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
Commission requires that the ECD be wipe tested at least once every 6months. A record of the results must be maintained for NRC inspection
for a period of three subsequent years.
In Canada, the ECD must be wipe tested at least once every twelve
months and a record of the results must be maintained for AECB
inspection for a period of three years.

Do not open Explorer or remove the ECD. If the ECD must be
removed from the instrument contact INFICON.
WARNING
Operation of ECD is fully automated. This includes setup and operation of the ECD.
The only setup required is to vent the detector and ensure the detector has been
selected for operation. Switching the column effluent to the ECD from the PID isdone with the SETUP key. You do not need to open the instrument in order to setup
the ECD.
Your method will determine the detectors that are in use. Your method may require
the PID and the ECD, the ECD only or the PID only. If the ECD is used as part of
the assay, Explorer will set the temperature and adjust the valve settings to direct
the column effluent to the correct detector. This will be done when the assay isdownloaded to the instrument.
If you need to develop your own method, you can select the ECD, PID or both,as described in Selecting Columns and Detectors on page 187.

86

Using Explorer

NOTE: You must use nitrogen carrier gas when you are using the ECD. If the internal
cylinder was used for air, fill it with nitrogen and purge it. Do this twice to ensure
there is no air in the cylinder. Use Ultra High Purity grade nitrogen. Use therefill adapter (MX380303 or MX380323) to fill the internal cylinder.

Setting up the ECD
1. Use flexible tubing fitted with luer adapters to vent the effluent from the ECD(port 2).
Vent the detector well away from the instrument and all users. If you are using
the GC indoors, you may want to vent the detector outside.
NOTE: Venting the ECD outlet does not affect the performance as long as the tubing does
not provide any restriction. Ensure the tubing is not kinked or stressed.
2. Change the view from the PID to the ECD by pressing Enter Menu, thenDISPLAY, GC, and DET.
3. When prompted to change views to the ECD, press Enter Menu.
4. When you first select the ECD for operation, monitor the offset level as
displayed on the status screen and wait until it has stabilized before attempting
to use the instrument.
An instrument that is cleaning out will show an unstable and dropping baseline.
Typical offset is in the range 200-800 mV and anything over 800 mV indicatescontamination.
5. Once the baseline is stable, calibrate the instrument as outlined in Calibration
starting on page 210.

87

Explorer Operator ManualHigh Accuracy Operation
When you are analyzing critical samples, you must allow Explorer to stabilize fora few hours before performing any runs. You must also calibrate the instrument
immediately before analyzing the critical samples.
Your calibration gas must contain all of the library compounds. The concentration of
the calibration compounds should be close to the concentration of the target
compounds.
You should also run an analysis of the calibration gas before and after running thecritical sample to ensure that the Explorer was performing correctly during theanalysis. If you calibrated directly from the tank of calibration gas, run an analysis
with Explorer connected directly to the tank. If you used a gas bag for calibration,
empty and refill the gas bag and then run an analysis using the gas bag as asample.

88

SiteChart Software

4SiteChart Software

Introduction
To perform any data analysis or to print chromatograms you must connect Explorer
to a PC running SiteChart software. The SiteChart software is designed to run
under Microsoft Windows. SiteChart enables you to:
Load assays
Control Explorer
Download assays to Explorer
Retrieve log analysis information from Explorer
Review log files
Compare a compound over several different analyses
Create a new assay
Add or remove compounds from the assay to create a new library
Modify chromatographic parameters in order to develop your own assay

90

Explorer Operator Manual

Installation
SiteChart software is installed on a PC that you can connect to Explorer directly
via the serial port of a PC using the Communication Cable Kit (MX380304).

PC Requirements
The PC must meet the following hardware and software requirements to run the
SiteChart software:
Pentiumbased personal computer

8 MB of RAM for Windows 95, 16 megabytes (MB) of RAM, minimum, forWindows NT (32 MB is recommended for Windows NT)
4 Megabytes of free hard disk space
Color, 600 x 800 display, adapter card and monitor supported by Windows
A Windows compatible printer is required in order to obtain printed reports
A mouse or another pointing device supported by Windows
A CD drive.
Connecting a Remote Computer
For added flexibility you can control Explorer through a remote computer. In thisconfiguration you will connect the computer at your location to a modem. You dialout to a second modem connected to Explorer. This option will be useful if you needto call into Explorer from home or from a separate location to view results. Also, if
an alarm or fault condition is encountered SiteChart can dial out and send an alarmor fault message.
To do this, in addition to the system described above you will also need an
external modem for Explorer and a modem for the remote computer, both 9600
baud or faster.
91

SiteChart Software

General Installation Information
To install SiteChart you must have a CD drive and 5 megabytes of free hard disk
space. The Setup utility detects minimum system requirements and warns you if
your system does not meet the requirements.
There are a few things you can do before you begin to ensure installation goessmoothly.
Turn off any virus protection software you are using, as it may interfere with
the Setup utility.
Exit any Windows programs you are running, this frees up memory for
installation and prevents possible conflicts between Setup and other programs.

Installing the SiteChart software
NOTE: The following instructions assume you are installing from drive A onto drive C. Run
the Setup program from the CD drive and install the SiteChart software onto thehard drive. The default directory is c:\Program Files\SiteChart\Program, if you
are installing to or from a different drive, substitute the appropriate drive name in
the following procedure.
1. Start Windows.
2. Insert SiteChart Disk #1 into the floppy drive.
3. Select Run from the Start menu.
The Run dialog is displayed.
4. Type a:\setup, as shown below, and click OK.

The installation choices are displayed.

92

Explorer Operator Manual

5. Select the installation option you require and click Next.
If you select Express, the SiteChart software wil be installed to the default
directory, c:\Program Files\SiteChart\Program.
You are now required to enter the registered user.

6. Enter Your Name and Organization and click Next.
A confirmation dialog is displayed.

93

SiteChart Software

7. Click Finish.
The installation begins.
A message will be displayed when the second disk is required.

8. Remove the first disk, insert SiteChart Disk #2 and click OK.
The installation continues.
Upon completion of installation, the setup utility will place icon in a new groupcalled PE Photovac SiteChart.
NOTE: After installation is complete do not delete any Explorer files from the c:\Program
Files\SiteChart\Program directory. Do not change the locations or names of thesefiles or their directories. The applications will be unable to find the necessary files
and they will not work properly if at all.

94

Explorer Operator Manual

Upgrading from Previous Versions
If you have a previous version of SiteChart installed, you do not need to remove itfrom your system before installing the most recent version, simply follow the
installation instructions above. The setup utility will overwrite the previous version
during installation as this version of SiteChart is completely compatible with theprevious version and you do not need to keep two versions on your system.

Installing your Assay Disk
Your Explorer is supplied with a disk with the Assay you have specified,customized for your Explorer. The data on this disk must be transferred to the PC
so that it can be loaded into your Explorer.
1. Create a new directory on the PC called c:\Program
Files\SiteChart\Data\assayX, where X is the number of the assay.
Create a new directory for each assay you need to load onto the PC.
If you have more than one instrument, create a directory for each instrument asassay disks are specific to the instrument with the matching serial number.
2. Copy all of the files from the Assay disk(s) to the correct directory using
Windows Explorer.

95

SiteChart Software

Connecting the PC to Explorer
Personal Computer
Do not connect a PC to Explorer in hazardous locations.

WARNING
Use the supplied communication cable (Part No. MX380304 with USB to
Serial Adapter PN 42530000) to connect the computer to Explorer. The
communication cable is a 25 to 9 pin cable.
1. Turn Explorer off.
You must turn the instrument off before connecting or disconnecting thecommunication cable.
2. Connect the 9-pin connector end of the communication cable (MX380304) tothe RS-232 port on Explorer.
Connect the 25-pin connector end to an unused serial port on your computer.
The serial port may be identified as COM 1 or COM 2. You will need one of
the two adapters, supplied with the communication cable. If you haveconnected the communication cable directly to the computer you are most
likely connected to a parallel port.
NOTE: Explorer cannot communicate with a parallel port.

96Explorer Operator Manual

Communicating with Multiple Instruments
NOTE: If you are using multiple instruments with a single copy of SiteChart, ensure you
end communication with one instrument before connecting another instrument to thecomputer.
1. When the first Explorer has downloaded all its information to the computer,turn it off and disconnect the communication cable from the instrument.
SiteChart will display a message indicating that it has lost connection with the
instrument. Do not connect another instrument to the computer until SiteChart
displays this message.
2. Ensure the second Explorer is off and connect the communication cable to the
RS-232 port.
SiteChart will establish communication with the second instrument and create acorresponding data directory.

Connecting a Printer to the Computer
Windows controls all printing from the computer. Although you issue the printcommands from SiteChart, Windows performs the actual printing. The choice ofprinters is only limited to those printers supported by Windows.
Ensure that the printer you are using is compatible with Microsoft Windows. Referto the Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List for information on which
printers are supported by Windows.
The printer can be locally connected to the computer’s parallel port or attached toyour computer network. The printer must be setup on the correct port and the printerdriver installed. This is done during installation of Windows or through theWindows Control Panel. Refer to the documentation supplied with Windows formore information.

97

SiteChart Software

Loading an Assay into Explorer
Now you can download the assay supplied with your Explorer into the instrument.
1. Start the SiteChart software.
2. On the Assay tab, select Open from the File menu and open the assay method
file (.app), from the c:\Program Files\SiteChart\Data\assayX directory set up
previously (see Installing your Assay Disk on page 95).
3. Make sure Explorer is connected to the PC as described in Connecting the PC
to Explorer on page 96.
4. Click Send to Explorer.
5. Once the file has been downloaded, allow at least 20 minutes for Explorer toreach the new assay set points.
6. Calibrate Explorer as described in Calibration starting on page 210.
You must calibrate Explorer so that compound concentrations will be
accurately reported.

Switching Assays
If you have ordered more than one assay for your instrument, you should copy all of
the assay information from the disks to your PC, creating a separate directory foreach assay.
To switch between assays:
1. From the Assay tab of the SiteChart software, select Open from the File menu
and open the required assay.
2. Click Send to Explorer.

98

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Once the file has been downloaded, allow at least 20 minutes for Explorer toreach the new assay set points and then calibrate Explorer.
If you have installed an assay that requires different carrier gas, you must purge
the carrier gas reservoir. Once you have filled the reservoir with the new carriergas, you must allow the instrument to purge for a few hours, preferably
overnight. This will flush the analytical engine with the new carrier gas.
NOTE: The Environmental Assay (Assay 1) method is specific to an Environmental Assay instrument. You
cannot install any other assay on an instrument configured for the Environmental Assay.

99

SiteChart Software

Overview
Starting SiteChart
From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then PE Photovac SiteChartand click SiteChart.
The default window is displayed.

The Default Window
The default window consists of a title bar, the menu bar and a status bar.
The title bar of the window contains the active file. The menu bar contains a list ofmenus. You open the menus and select commands to control the operation of
SiteChart.
The File Menu controls opening, saving, printing and transferring of analysis
results, assays and log files.
The View Menu allows you to select the type of data to be displayed.
100Explorer Operator Manual

The Analyzer Menu controls Explorer.
The Communications Menu controls communication between Explorer andthe computer and also between local and remote computers.
The Help Menu provides information about using SiteChart.
The tabs below the title bar provide a quick interface from which you cancontrol operation of SiteChart or Explorer, and review logged data.
The menu commands will act for the active tab. For example, if the Instrument tab is
active, then the Print command on the File menu will print an analysis report of thechromatogram that is displayed, but if the Assay tab is open then an assay report will
be printed.

Sizing the Application
You can size SiteChart to fill your entire desktop or a portion of the desktop to suit
your application.
To maximize the application screen or a tab, click on the maximize button.
To reduce the application to fill a portion of your screen, click on the restore
button.
You can then size the window to the desired dimensions by clicking on theouter edge of the window and dragging the edge out to the desired size.
The application window will be sized to fit the selected dimensions.
To reduce the application to an icon, click on the minimize button.

101

SiteChart Software

The Assay Tab

The information in the Assay tab is used to define the chromatographic method foryour application. One assay has been provided with your instrument. Use the assay
to familiarize yourself with the operation of both Explorer and SiteChart. When
you are comfortable using Explorer and SiteChart, you may want to customize themethod to better suit your application.
Assay notes have been supplied to provide specific information related to yourassay. Refer to the assay notes before making any modifications to the method.

Installing the Standard Method
You need to download the method to Explorer as part of the initial instrument set
up procedure.

102

Explorer Operator Manual

Follow the instructions below:
1. Make a copy of the assay disk, and store the original.
2. Create a new directory for your assay disk.
If you have more than one instrument, create a directory for each instrument.
Assay disks are specific to the instrument with the matching serial number.
3. Copy the contents of the assay disk into this directory.
Each assay you have ordered will be supplied on one 3.5” disk. Refer to theassay notes for details of the files on the disk.
4. Connect Explorer to a serial port on the computer.
5. Turn on Explorer and allow it to warm up.
6. Start SiteChart.
7. Go to the Assay tab and open the assay.
Depending on which assay you are loading, you may be prompted, by Assay
Wizard, to configure your library with respect to co-eluting compounds. See
Assay Wizard on page 104.
8. Check the assay settings and then click on the Send to Explorer button.
If assays created on one instrument are downloaded to a second instrument anerror message will be displayed. You must update the library for the second
instrument as outlined in Updating Library Information on page 110.
Once the file has been downloaded, Explorer has been set up for your assay.
9. Calibrate Explorer.
NOTE: You must calibrate Explorer so that compound concentrations will be accurately
reported.

103

SiteChart Software

Assay Wizard
Assay Wizard is displayed when opening an assay that contains multiple peaks withsimilar retention times. Assay Wizard will allow you to select one compound, in theco-elution, for your application. Assay Wizard will only appear if a co-elution has
been identified in your assay.
1. Select the Assay tab and open your assay (Ctrl + O).
If the assay contains co-elutions, Assay Wizard opens.
Step 1 of the wizard provides information about the assay.
2. Click Continue to go to the next step.
If you click Cancel, Assay Wizard will not modify your library and yourcompounds of interest may be misidentified or concentrations may beinaccurate.
Assay Wizard now scans the library, looking for compounds with similarretention times. When it finds something it prompts you to pick one of thecompounds.
3. Select the required compound.
If neither of the displayed compounds is required for your application, thenclick None.
4. Click Continue to move to the next co-elution.
NOTE: As you move through Assay Wizard, remember the compounds that you do not selectare possible interferences.
When Assay Wizard finishes, it will update all the column libraries accordingly andwill remove the unwanted compounds from the libraries. If there is a chance that anyof these compounds may be present at any time, then you must abort Assay Wizard
and leave the compounds in the library.
Compound names are limited to 15 characters in order to fit Explorer’s display.
Some names have been abbreviated in order to meet the 15-character limit. Referto the assay notes for a list of abbreviations.

104Explorer Operator Manual

Column/Detector Selection
The Column/Detector drop-down list box allows you to select the column/detector
combination for reviewing and editing the assay. Your method may use one, two or
all three columns to complete an analysis. If your method consists of runs on two or
three columns, you must configure one column at a time. Configure all of thecolumns required for your application before you send the assay to Explorer.
The library for the selected column will be displayed in the Library block and themethod specific to the column/detector combination will be displayed in the method
block.
To select a column/detector combination:
1. Select the Assay tab.
Ensure your assay is loaded.
2. Click on the arrow of the Column/Detector drop-down list box.
3. Select the desired column/detector combination.

MethodThe standard method is listed in the Method Box. The injection method, theinjection volume, the oven temperature, pressure and the analysis time are listed in
the method box. These are all set when you open an assay.
NOTE: Do not change any of the chromatographic settings, as the reference library will be
lost.
Open the Config box to change the method settings. Refer to the Method
Development section for details of method development, or assay specific details areprovided in the assay notes.

105SiteChart Software

Reference Chromatogram
The reference chromatogram on the Assay tab may be used to modify the library
information. Only one run can be displayed. This chromatogram does not change
when you select a different column/detector combination. It may not be thechromatogram associated with the currently selected column/detector combinationor the library.
NOTE: Before making any changes to the assay, ensure that the displayed chromatogram
was run on the same instrument using the currently selected column.
When you save the assay, the chromatogram is also saved. When you load a new
assay, SiteChart will try and load the analysis file as well. If it cannot be located,then a message is displayed and the remaining assay information is loaded.
View Pop-up Menu
A pop-up menu, with the View menu options, is displayed by moving the mouseinto the graph area and clicking the right mouse button (right-clicking).
The Pop-up menu has the following functions:
Turn the Grid on or off.
The grid makes it easier to estimate retention times and peak heights from thechromatogram.
Smooth the chromatogram by the required number of Points so that low

concentration peaks can be more easily integrated.
After the chromatogram has been smoothed, you can re-integrate it.
You can change the Integration Method and Reintegrate the chromatogram.
This is useful if you need to store peaks that are not well integrated.
Change the Font size of the text on the chromatogram.
You can set the font to Small, Medium, Large or Automatic. Automatic
adjusts the font size to fit the current view options.

106Explorer Operator Manual
Peak Labels option selects the peak labels that are displayed on the graph.
None displays no peak labels.
Numbers will number each integrated peak.
Labels will display the peak name if the peak can be identified.
Numbers and Names displays a number and the peak name.

Turn the Status Block on or off.
The status block displays the signal level and the slope of the signal at a time
defined by the position of the cross-hair. The cross hair does not need to be
directly on the signal.
Previous Zoom, Auto Range and Normalize all allow you to view thechromatogram in different ways.
Whats This allows you to get on-line help for the reference chromatogram.

Loading a New Reference Chromatogram
To load a new reference chromatogram:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. From the File menu select Open and open the .PID or .ECD file containing thechromatogram that you want to display.
When the file is loaded, the chromatogram will be displayed in the graph block.
This file may be independent of the selected column/detector combination andthe library.
NOTE: Before making any changes to the assay, ensure that the displayed chromatogram
was run on the same instrument using the currently selected column/detector
combination.

107

SiteChart Software

Peak Information Tool Tip
To obtain information about the peaks in the chromatogram:Move the mouse pointer over any peak in the chromatogram.
When you move the pointer into the graph area, the pointer changes into across-hair.
Leave the cross hair over the peak and an information box will pop-up. The
box contains the peak name, retention time and the integrated area.
Zoom Feature
To zoom in on any area of the chromatogram:
1. Move the pointer to one corner of the zoom box.
The zoom box will be the area that you want to zoom in on.
2. Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the opposite corner of thezoom box.
When you release the left mouse button, SiteChart will enlarge the selectedarea to fit the chromatogram box.
3. Repeat these steps until you have obtained the desired view.
To return to the previous zoom view, open the pop-up menu and selectPrevious Zoom.
You can also select the Previous Zoom option from the View menu.
Window Percent
To adjust the window percent directly in the chromatogram:
1. Select the Assay tab.

108

Explorer Operator Manual

2. Open the .PID or .ECD file containing the chromatogram run on the currently
selected column.
When you select a compound in the library, the compound matching the libraryretention time will be selected in the reference chromatogram. Three dashed,blue lines will display the current window percent around the peak.
3. To change the window percent value for the selected compound, move thecrosshair onto one of the outer lines and drag the line closer or further from thepeak. When you release the mouse button the window percent will be updated
accordingly.
You can also set the window percent by entering an exact value in thecompound information box.
Setting the window percent may require some practice. If the window percent
is too small, the peak may drift out of the window and the compound may not
be identified. If you set the window percent to high, your peak may be
misidentified.

Compound Library
A compound library is supplied for each column/detector pair required for the assay.
The number of libraries is determined by the assay. These libraries have been
determined for the assay standard method. The libraries are always available on theassay disk so you can use the original method and the information in the library.
When you open an assay you will open a copy of the library. Once it has been
opened in SiteChart, it becomes the current library. You can edit it and update it asrequired by your application. If you modify the current library in any way, you mustsave the assay.
If the method is changed, the reference libraries are no longer valid and willautomatically be deleted from SiteChart. Refer to the assay notes for details of thereference library and the associated method.

109

SiteChart Software

Updating Library Information
If your chromatographic settings have not changed from the original assay, but
library compounds are not correctly identified or not identified at all, they may havedrifted out of the peak recognition window. You can update library information
based on a recent chromatogram that has been run using the original assay.
To update library information:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. Open the original assay and save it with a new name.
3. Click Send to Explorer to send the assay information to Explorer.
4. Select the first column/detector pair.
If your application uses 2 or 3 columns you must repeat this procedure for eachcolumn. If you are using the ECD, you must repeat this procedure for each
ECD library.
5. Remove all the unwanted compounds from the library.
To remove a compound from the library, select it and press Delete.
6. Run a chromatogram on the selected column/detector pair.
The chromatogram must contain all the compounds listed in your library. It
must also be run using your original assay method.
Allow Explorer to warm up for at least 30 minutes before running thechromatogram.
7. Re-integrate the chromatogram.
Use the re-integrate command in the Analyzer menu or right-click on thechromatogram and select re-integrate from the pop-up menu. Compounds
matching library information will be identified.
8. Click on the first compound in the library.

110

Explorer Operator Manual

9. Review the data in the library information box.
Compounds present in the calibration gas must be selected for calibration.
Compounds that are not present in the calibration gas must be removed.
NOTE: All compounds contained in the library must be contained in the calibration gas. If
this is not the case, contact INFICON.
10. Ensure you have entered the correct calibration concentration.
This is the concentration of the compound in your calibration gas.
Blue dashed lines will be displayed where SiteChart is expecting to find thecompound.
11. If the compound peak is the only peak within the retention time window, click
Update or double-click on the peak to open the Update dialog box. If theinformation in the box is not correct, enter the correct data and click OK.
OR
If the compound peak is not within the retention time window or if there areother peaks in the retention time window, drag the center, blue, dashed line tothe desired peak. The retention time will be updated automatically.
12. Repeat this procedure for each library compound.
13. Re-integrate the chromatogram.
Select re-integrate from the Analyzer menu or right-click on thechromatogram and select re-integrate from the pop-up menu.
Each compound should be correctly identified.
14. If you are using another column for your application, repeat this procedure forthe next column.
15. Save the assay and then send it to Explorer.
16. Select the Instrument Tab and run an analysis on each column.

111

SiteChart Software

17. Ensure all compounds are correctly identified and then use these analyses tocalibrate Explorer.
Interference Compounds
Compounds can be added to the library for identification purposes only. Using thisfeature will allow compounds to be identified in a peak report but no concentration
data will be calculated. Interference compounds, included in some assays, areprovided in this way. Compounds listed in the library without response data stillneed to be calibrated for retention time drift.
To assign interference compounds:
1. Store the compounds as outlined in Adding Compounds to the Library on page162.
2. Select the compound in the library.
3. Select the point in the area/concentration table and click Erase.
The response data for the compound will be removed. The (0, 0) point and theretention time information remain in the library.
4. Save the assay.

112

Explorer Operator Manual

Compound Library Information
Compound nameCalibration averaging
Compound information

Calibration information
Compound retention time
Curve fit options

Compound response
information

Figure 5 Compound Library Information Box
The library information for the selected compound is displayed in an information
box on the right side of the Assay tab. The box contains all the calibration
information for the peak currently selected in the library. The library information isused by SiteChart to identify and quantify integrated peaks.
Details of each parameter are not provided in this section. A brief description ofeach parameter will be covered in the method development section where you will
use all these features to add compounds to the library.

113

SiteChart Software

Enabling Calibration Compounds
The first check box allows you to select the compound for calibration. If thecompound is present in the library you must calibrate on it. If it is not required aspart of your application remove it from the library.
During calibration, Explorer looks for all the calibration compounds and updates
its library information based on the retention time and response for eachcalibration compound.

Calibration Averaging
The second check box enables calibration averaging. If you enable this option, youmust also enter the number of runs you want averaged. It provides a method toensure reliable calibration for potentially unstable compounds. You can also use
calibration averaging when you are calibrating by syringe injection.
Calibration averaging allows you to update the response of a library compound
based on the average of one or more runs. If the number of runs is set to 1, theresponse of a single calibration run is copied directly into the library and there is no
averaging. If the number of runs was changed to three, the library will take theaverage of the next three calibration runs and update the response factor. As you
perform more calibrations the three most recent calibrations will be used to update
the library response.
There is independent control of calibration averaging for each compound. This
allows you to have higher averaging factors for those compounds that exhibit lessrepeatability.
NOTE: Do not enable calibration averaging for compounds not contained in thecalibration gas.
If you are using calibration averaging to update compound information that may beunstable, you may want to calibrate more frequently to ensure that your library
response is reliable.

114

Explorer Operator Manual

Other Features
Enter the concentration of the compound in the calibration gas.
This concentration should be close to the concentration to be detected.
Enter an alarm level.
If an alarm is exceeded an audible alarm may sound and an alarmacknowledge box will be displayed. The audio options are selected on
Explorer itself, see Audio Options on page 67.
Enter the window percent.
The window percent is the deviation in retention time for which Explorer willcompensate. For example, if the window is set at 10%, a compound with aretention time of 100 seconds will still be identified if it elutes between 90 and
110 seconds. Most compounds have a 3  5% window.
Select how you want the peak identified: as the largest peak in the window oras the closest retention time in the library.
If there are interference compounds, that appear at the same retention time, but
are not as responsive to the PID or are present in very low concentrations, thenselect the largest peak in the window.
If the interference compound is close in detector response, but has a different
retention time, then select closest retention time.

Calibration Curve
Select the desired curve fit option. You must create the calibration curve by storing
the compound at multiple concentrations throughout the range of your application.
You can store up to 5 concentration points.
If it is not possible to store the compound at 5 concentrations, store the compound at
two concentrations within the range of your application to ensure the best results.
The concentration and the corresponding area are shown for all concentration points
that you have stored. See Multiple Point Calibration Curve on page 165 for detailsof storing a compound at more than one concentration.

115

SiteChart Software

Once you have stored multiple points you can select the best curve to fit the points.
If one concentration point is stored, SiteChart draws a line from this (0, 0) to thesingle point and uses the line as the calibration curve. If the compound is stored at asecond, higher concentration, sample concentrations are calculated using the firstsensitivity when the concentration is below the lower concentration. For
concentrations above the lower value, SiteChart uses a sensitivity value calculated
from the slope of the line connecting the two concentration response points.

Figure 6 Linear Calibration Curve
If a third, higher concentration is stored, then the concentrations above the second
value are measured using a sensitivity value calculated from the slope of the line
connecting the second and third concentration response points. You can store up to
five concentration points.
A quadratic calibration curve fits a quadratic function to the points you have stored.
In order to use the quadratic calibration curve, you must store at least 2 or morepoints. The curve will always start at (0, 0) and go through at least 2 points you havestored and (0,0).
In order to obtain the most accurate results you should store a point that is at the top
end of the desired concentration range. If you are interested in the range 10 to 100
ppm, store a point at 100 ppm. Data past this point will be extrapolated based on atangent through the last stored point.

116

Explorer Operator Manual

Figure 7 Quadratic Calibration Curve

117

SiteChart Software

The Instrument Tab

The Instrument tab is used to control the instrument. Only one instrument may beconnected at a time. You can run multiple copies of SiteChart to control multiple
instruments. See Connecting Multiple Instruments on page 164. You must have a
serial port for each instrument. Alternatively, you can connect one instrument at atime to the computer. See Communicating with Multiple Instruments on page 97.
The Instrument tab displays a chromatogram, a peak report and an instrument
status bar. When you are controlling the instrument from SiteChart, use theInstrument tab to monitor the progress of analyses and the status of the instrument.

118

Explorer Operator Manual

Peak Report
The peak report displays a listing of the detected peaks. Peaks that match a libraryretention time are identified and those that do not are listed as unknown.
The following information is provided for each peak:
Parameter

Description

Compound

The compound name as listed in the library. A red X
before the compound name indicates the detectedconcentration has exceeded the preset alarm level.

#

The peak number in the current chromatogram.

Det

The detector used. This will be a PID or an ECD.

R.T. (sec)The peak retention time.

Conc. (ppm)

The detected concentration as determined from thelibrary response value. Compounds with no response datasuch as interference compounds will always be reported
as 0.0 ppm.

Area (mVS)

The integrated area. This is determined from theintegration method.

Height (mV)The peak height.

Status

The status of the peaks.
Ratio-metric calibration may lead to an invalid
calibration and is intended for specialized applications
only. Please contact INFICON Technical Support for
more details.

119SiteChart Software

Each one of these fields can be sized.
To size individual fields:
1. Move the mouse to the edge of the field.
The pointer will change into a double-headed arrow.
2. Press the left mouse button and drag the arrow to set the field to the desired
size.

Chromatogram
The chromatogram is displayed in the graph box. Select the signal to be viewed
from the Graph View drop-down box. You can select TVOC, PID, ECD or PID and
ECD. If you select PID and ECD the graph will be split and you can view the signal
from each detector.
A pop-up menu, with the View menu options, is displayed by moving the mouseinto the graph area and clicking the right mouse button (right-clicking). Theview options are described in Reference Chromatogram on page 106.
Peak Information
To obtain information about the peaks in the chromatogram:
1. Move the mouse pointer over any peak in the chromatogram.
When you move the pointer into the graph area, the pointer changes into acrosshair.
2. If you leave the cross hair over the peak an information box will pop-up.
The box contains the peak name, retention time and the integrated area.

120

Explorer Operator Manual

Zoom Feature
To zoom in on any part of the chromatogram:
1. Move the pointer to one corner of the zoom box.
The zoom box will be the area that you want to zoom in on.
2. Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the opposite end of the zoom
box. When you release the left mouse button, SiteChart will enlarge theselected area to fit the graph block.
3. Repeat these steps until you have obtained the desired view.
To return to the previous zoom view, open the pop-up menu and selectPrevious Zoom.
You can also select the Previous Zoom option from the View menu.

121SiteChart Software

Instrument Status

Figure 8 Example instrument status
When the instrument is connected to the computer, the information in the instrument
status box is continuously updated to ensure an accurate status display.
The displayed pressure is the column head pressure.
This value is set by the assay that is currently loaded.
The syringe graphic represents the injection volume.
This is only used if loop injection is enabled. If you are performing syringe
injection, you will determine the injection volume.
The displayed temperature is the column temperature and is set by the assay.
The battery level shows the current charge of the internal battery.
When Explorer is connected to the AC adapter the charge should be 9.0
volts.
The column in use will be in line with the sample loop.
122

Explorer Operator Manual

The lamp indicates the PID is in use.
If an ECD is installed it will be displayed beside the lamp.
Double-click on the lamp or the ECD to open a pop-up menu. You can also
click on the right mouse button to open the same pop-up menu. You can turnthe PID or the ECD on or off from this pop-up menu. Turn the detector off if
you are not running chromatograms.
NOTE: Turning the detector off does not turn the instrument off.
The PID parameters are listed in the table below the lamp.
Parameter

Description

State

The state of the detector, You can turn the lamp on or off.

Signal (mV)The current detector signal level.

Offset (mV)The voltage applied to keep the baseline at 10% of
fullscale. The applied offset is an indication of column
contamination. If the offset is greater than 800 mV thecolumn should be allowed to flush until the offset stabilizes
at a value between 200 and 800 mV.

Temp. ( C)

The operating temperature of the photoionization detector.

Target (%)

The intensity to which Explorer attempts to tune its
UV lamp.

Tune (%)

The percentage of the intensity (of a reference lamp)
to which the Explorer tries to tune the UV lamp.

Tune (V)The tuning voltage supplied to the lamp control circuitry.

If the ECD is selected for operation, parameters specific to the ECD will be
displayed in a second column.

123SiteChart Software

Parameter

Description

ECD Signal

The current signal from the electron capture
detector.

ECD Offset

The voltage applied to keep the baseline at
10% of fullscale. The applied offset is anindication of column contamination. If theoffset is greater than 800 mV the column
should be allowed to flush until the offset
stabilizes between 200 and 800 mV.

ECD Temp.

The operating temperature of the electron
capture detector. The temperature can be set
independently of the column and PID. See
ECD Temperature on page 198.

Start/Stop Button
Selecting a Column
When you start a single run, SiteChart will begin the run on the column you selected
through the Analyzer menu or the Column Selection Pop-up Menu. Your assay may
require you to perform two or three runs in order to complete an analysis. One run isperformed on each column. If this is the case, then you must enable all the required
columns on Explorer automatically cycles through the enabled columns each time
you press the local Start/Stop button. 2
SiteChart overrides this process and starts a run on the selected column only. If you
want to cycle through the columns that are required to complete an analysis, youhave two options. If you are manually performing runs, select the required column
and then press the Start/Stop button. If you are using this method, you can perform
loop or syringe injections.

124Explorer Operator Manual

Alternatively, you can use the auto cycling features. When you start auto cycling,
Explorer will begin a run on the next column to be analyzed. The next analysis will
be run on the next enabled column. The instrument determines column selection.
If you are using auto cycling, you must use loop injections. See Auto Cycling
Operation on page 148.
NOTE: Columns must be enabled on Explorer.
Starting a Run
To start a run:
1. Ensure Explorer is set up correctly.
Carrier gas must be supplied to the instrument. Explorer must be displaying a
Ready status.
2. Select the Assay tab and ensure the correct assay is loaded.
3. Ensure Explorer is on and ready for operation and then send the information to
Explorer by clicking Send to Explorer.
4. Select the Instrument tab and select the column on which to perform a run.
Open the Analyzer menu and select the column or right-click on the column
graphic in the instrument status box to open a column selection pop-up menu.
Selecting Column V will start a TVOC run.
5. Connect a sample to the sample inlet port or allow Explorer to draw a sample
of room air. If you are performing a syringe injection prepare the syringe
sample.
6. Press Start to begin the run.
Explorer will begin a run according to the method for the selected column.
A timer at the bottom of the instrument status box shows you the analysis timeand progress of the run.
The chromatogram will develop in the graph box. As peaks are integrated they
will be displayed in the peak report.

125SiteChart Software

7. When the run is complete, SiteChart will save the run to a directory it hascreated for the instrument.
Stopping a Run
Once the run has been started the button changes to a stop button. To stop theanalysis before it is complete, press Stop. If you stopped the analysis after the
sample was injected onto the column you must wait for the duration of the analysis
time. The column will be flushed to remove any compounds that entered thecolumn.
When you stop an analysis, Explorer will flush the column for the duration of
the analysis time before beginning another analysis on the same column.

Saving a Run
All runs are saved automatically when they are received from the instrument.
Explorer creates the file name as described in File Name Format on page 131. To
save the file with a new name, use the Save As command. Use Save when you haveedited a file and need to update it.
To update an existing file:
1. Select the Instrument tab.
2. Open the File menu and select Save (Alt, F, S).
The displayed file will be saved with the current file name.
To save a file with a new name or to save an existing file to a new location:
1. Select the Instrument tab.

126

Explorer Operator Manual

2. Open the File menu and select Save As (Alt, F, A).
SiteChart will save the file as a .PID or .ECD file. If you are viewing both PID
and ECD files, both file types will be saved with the same name andcorresponding extension.
For example if you viewing a file that contains a chromatogram from the PID
and from the ECD and you save the file with the name TEST, two files will besaved: TEST.PID and TEST.ECD
3. Enter a file name or use the existing file name.
4. Select the drive and directory to which the file will be saved.
5. Click Save.

Printing an Analysis Report
To print an analysis report:
1. Select the Instrument tab.
2. Connect Explorer to the computer and ensure communication has been
established with the instrument.
3. Perform a run.
4. When the analysis is complete, open the File menu and select Print (Alt, F, P).
5. When the Print dialog box opens, check your print settings. Ensure your printeris configured correctly.
6. Click OK to print the analysis.
The analysis report includes results, method, integration method, notes and a peakreport. A chromatogram is also printed. The chromatogram is printed as it appearson the screen. If the graph has been normalized it will be printed in the normalized
view.

127

SiteChart Software

The Log Review Tab

Once data has been acquired from Explorer, it can be reviewed using the Log
Review tab. This tab allows you to scroll through and review, completed runs stored
in the datalogger of a particular instrument. When the instrument is connected to
SiteChart, the contents of the datalogger are automatically downloaded to SiteChart.
All analyses received from an instrument will be stored in the data sub-directory
selected during installation of SiteChart. SiteChart was designed to accept data frommultiple instruments so the log directory is divided into sub-directories. Each subdirectory corresponds to information received from a single instrument. These subdirectories are created using the instrument serial numbers. For example, if one
instrument has the serial number “123”, then all the information received from this
instrument will be recorded in a sub-directory of the data directory called “123”. The
path would be c:\Program Files\SiteChart\Data\123\filename.PID.

128

Explorer Operator Manual

Log Listing
To generate a log listing:
1. Select the type of files to be reviewed from the Display drop-down list box.
You can view GC files, TVOC files or both GC and TVOC files.
2. In the Directory box, double-click to select the drive and directory where your
Explorer files are stored. In this directory, there should be a sub-directory
corresponding to the serial number of the instrument. Select this sub-directory.
The Log Review list to the right of the Directory box will list all the recorded
analyses. The log listing includes the following information:
Field Name

Description

Filename

The name of the stored analysis. SiteChart generates filenames, you can change the file name using the Save As
command in the File menu.

Date and Time

The date and time the run was started.

TAG

The tag used to identify a certain run or group of runs.

Instrument

The instrument serial number.

ColumnThe column used.

Detector

PID or ECD.

Assay

Assay 1 (Environmental) and 2 (Petrochemical)

Peaks

The number of integrated peaks.

Status

The status of the peaks. Ratio-metric calibration may lead toan invalid calibration and is intended for specialized
applications only.

129

SiteChart Software

Each one of these fields can be sized.
To resize a field:
1. Move the mouse to the edge of the field. The pointer will change into a doubleheaded arrow.
2. Press the left mouse button and drag the arrow to set the field to the desired
size.

Update Log Listing
If the instrument is connected to the computer and is performing runs, completed
runs will be added to the current directory. If you are reviewing data from thecurrent directory, SiteChart will update your log listing whenever a run is added tothe directory. This could be a time consuming task if you have a long list of files. To
prevent the list from being updated automatically, you can disable this feature.
To disable automatic update feature:
1. Open the View menu and select Auto Update Log Listing.
The check mark will disappear and new runs will be logged to the computer
but will not be added to the log review list.
2. To manually update your log listing, open the View menu and select Update
Log Listing.

130

Explorer Operator Manual

File Name Format
All files are saved in a unique name.extention format, where the name is an 8character string.
XYMMDD##.EXT
X

The column on which the analysis was run. Will be A, B,
C or V.

Y

The last digit of the current year.

MM

The current month (01 is January, 12 is December)

DD

Current Day##

Unique identification number to differentiate between
runs performed on the same date. Run numbers start at
00.

EXT

.PID, .ECD, .VOC

To sort the log listing, click on the column header on which to sort. The column will
be automatically sorted alphabetically, or numerically.
NOTE: This could be a time consuming process, depending on the speed of your computer.

131

SiteChart Software

Log Review
You can scroll through the listing and select a file to review.
1. Use the mouse to select a file.
When the file is selected the chromatogram is displayed. You can review themethod, notes or the peak report for the analysis in the box to the right of thechromatogram.
2. A pop-up menu, with the View menu options, is displayed by moving themouse into the graph area and clicking the right mouse button (right-clicking).
See Reference Chromatogram on page 106 for details of viewing thechromatogram.
3. Move the mouse pointer over any peak in the chromatogram to obtain
information about the peaks in the chromatogram.
Leave the cross-hair over the peak and an information box will pop-up. The
box contains the peak name, retention time and the integrated area.
4. You can modify the selected analysis by re-integrating or adding notes.
If you modify the analysis, it is automatically saved.
Each file in the log represents a single run. If an assay requires 2 detectors and 3
runs to complete an analysis, then the results for the assay will be spread across 6
files.

Printing the Log Review FileTo print the log review file:
1. Create the log listing as outlined in the previous section.
2. From the File menu select Print Log Report (Alt, F, L).

132

Explorer Operator Manual

You can also print an analysis report for a selected file:
1. Select the file for which you want the analysis report.
2. From the File menu select Print (Alt, F, P).

Saving the Log Review File
Saving the log file will create an ASCII comma delimited file. You can import thisfile into spreadsheet applications such as Excel .
To save a log file:
1. Create the log listing as outlined in the previous section.
2. From the File menu select Save As (Alt, F, A).
3. Enter a name for the log file.
The file will be saved as a SiteChart log file with the extension .log.
4. Select whether or not you want the file created as a read-only file.
5. Click Save.
The comma delimited log file cannot be opened in SiteChart.

133

SiteChart Software

Compound Review Tab

To analyze the results on the basis of a single compound, use the Compound Review
tab. This tab allows you to generate a graph of concentrations for a specificcompound over a range of runs.

Compound Concentration Graph
To create a concentration versus run graph:
1. In the Directory box, select the drive and directory where your Explorer files
are stored. In this directory, there should be a sub-directory identified by theserial number of the instrument. Select this sub-directory.
2. The Log Review list to the right of the Directory box will list all the recorded
analyses.
The compound review list is the same as the log review listing. See the tablebelow for a description of each field in the listing.
3. If necessary size the fields accordingly.
134Explorer Operator Manual

4. Select the analyses for which a compound report is required. Use the extend
select feature by pressing, and holding, the SHIFT key. Select the first run andthe last run in the range.
5. Wait for a few seconds while the hour glass is displayed. Select the compoundlist.
A drop-down list box will appear displaying a list of all compounds that arepresent in at least one of the selected analyses.
6. Select the desired compound.
The compound table will be filled with every occurrence of the compound in
the selected analyses. The graph will be drawn based on the data in thecompound table.
7. If the order in which the data is displayed is not suitable, you can sort the data.
Click on the header of the column you want to sort.
The table, and graph, will be updated to reflect the sorted data.
Field Name

Description

Date

The date the run was started

Time

The time the run was started

TAG

The tag used to identify a certain run orgroup of runs

Concentration

The detected concentration

Height (mV)The peak height.

Area (mVS)

The integrated area. This is determined fromthe integration method.

ColumnThe column used for the run

135SiteChart Software

Detector

PID or ECD

Status

The status of the peaks.
Ratio-metric calibration may lead to aninvalid calibration and is intended forspecialized applications only. Please contact
the Applications Department for moredetails.

By selecting a row in the compound table, the corresponding bar, in the graph, ishighlighted. Conversely, by selecting a bar in the graph, the corresponding row inthe compound table will be highlighted. This is useful when viewing a graph andtable with many entries.
Right-clicking on the graph will open the View Pop-up menu. All options
available to this graph will be displayed. See View Pop-up Menu on page 106 fordetails.

Update Compound Listing

If the instrument is connected to the computer and is performing runs, completed
runs will be added to the current directory. If you are reviewing data from thecurrent directory, SiteChart will update your compound listing whenever a run isadded to the directory. This could be a time consuming task if you have a long list of
files. To prevent the list from being updated automatically, you can disable thisfeature.
To update your compound listing:
1. Open the View menu and select Auto Update Log Listing.
The check mark will disappear and new runs will be logged to the computer
but will not be added to the compound review list.
2. To manually update your compound list, open the View menu and selectUpdate Log Listing.

136

Explorer Operator Manual

Save the Compound Review File
Saving the log file will create an ASCII comma delimited file. You can import thisfile into spreadsheet applications such as Microsoft Excel .
To save a compound report:
1. Create the log listing as outlined in Compound Review Tab on page 134.
2. From the File menu, select Save As (Alt, F, A).
3. Enter a name for the log file.
The file will be saved as a SiteChart log file.
4. Select whether or not you want the file created as a read-only file.
5. Click Save.
The comma delimited file log file cannot be opened in SiteChart.

Printing the Compound Review FileTo print a compound report:
1. Create the log listing as outlined above.
2. Select the files from the listing to be included in the compound listing.
3. Select the compound of interest from the drop-down list box.
4. From the File menu, select Print Log Report (Alt, F, L).

137

SiteChart Software

SiteChart Menus
File Menu
The File Menu allows you to open and save assays and data files, convert to andfrom standard GC file formats, print data and log reports, and exit SiteChart.
New
The New command allows you to create assays. The New command is available
when the Assay tab is selected.
To create a new assay in SiteChart:
1. Open the File menu and select New (Alt, F, N).
SiteChart will ask whether or not an electron capture detector (ECD) is
installed in your instrument.
A new file is created with no information in any of the tabs.
2. Load a chromatogram from which you can add compound information to thelibrary or perform a run, save it and add compound information from the newchromatogram. See Adding Compounds to the Library on page 175.
Use New when you want to create a new assay, without having to delete all theexisting library compounds. Normally, you will load an existing assay, modify andtest it and then save it as a new assay.
Open
Use the Open command to open and display an assay, or a sample file. The Opencommand is available to the Assay.
To open an assay:
1. Click on the Assay tab or the Compound Review tab.

138

Explorer Operator Manual

2. From the File menu select Open (Alt, F, O).
SiteChart will show application (.app) and method (.apm) files.
3. Select the required type of files to be displayed in the Files of Type drop-downlist.
4. Select the correct drive and directory.
5. Select the file and click Open or double-click on the file name to open the file.
OR
You can also enter a specific file name.
You must also enter the correct path so SiteChart can locate the file. For
example, you can type c:\mydocs\test.app. If you do not know the file name,use * as a wildcard. For example, type “*.app”, to see a list of all application
files on the specified drive and directory.
The Column/Detector option will display Column A-PID and the Library will
display the Column A-PID library list. This is the default option. If a sample
file (PID or ECD) was saved with the application, then it is also displayed.
NOTE: The chromatogram may not correspond to the selected column.
To open a PID or ECD sample file:
1. Click on the Assay tab.
2. In the Files of Type drop-down list select the required type of detector: ECD
Samples, PID Samples, or All Samples.
3. Select the directory to which you copied your assay disks.
4. Select the file and click Open or double-click on the file.
The sample information for the selected chromatogram is displayed.

139

SiteChart Software

Save and Save As
To update an existing file:
1. Click on the Assay tab or Instrument tab.
2. Open the File menu and select Save (Alt, F, S).
To save a new file or save an existing file to a new location:
1. Click on the Assay tab or Instrument tab.
2. Open the File menu and select Save As (Alt, F, A).
If you clicked on the Assay tab, SiteChart will save the file as a .app. If you
were in the Instrument tab, SiteChart will save the file as a .PID or .ECD file.
3. Enter a file name or use the existing file name.
Limit your file names to 10 characters. Site Chart will add the appropriate
extension.
4. Select the drive and directory to which the file will be saved.
5. Click Save.
Print
Use the Print command to obtain printed reports. The type of report printed will
depend on which tab is selected when you select the Print command.
To print an assay report:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. Load the assay to be printed.

140

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Open the File menu and select Print (Alt, F, P).
The Print dialog box opens. You must install and configure your printerthrough Windows Control Panel. Refer to the Windows documentation for
details.
4. If you have installed more than one printer, select the desired printer and clickOK.
An assay report will be printed. The assay report contains all the informationfrom the Assay tab.
To print an analysis report:
1. Select the Instrument tab.
2. Connect Explorer to the computer and ensure communication has been
established with the instrument.
3. Perform a run.
4. When the analysis is complete, open the File menu and select Print (Alt, F, P).
5. When the Print dialog box opens, check your print settings. Ensure your printeris configured correctly.
6. Click OK to print the analysis.
To print an analysis report for files that have been saved:
1. Select the Log Review tab.
2. Select the directory in which your files are saved.
The .PID or .ECD files will be displayed.
3. Select the file to be printed.
4. Open the File menu and select Print (Alt, F, P).

141

SiteChart Software

5. When the Print dialog box opens, check your print settings. Ensure your printeris configured correctly.
6. Click OK to print the analysis.
The analysis report includes results, method, integration method, notes and a peakreport. A chromatogram is also printed. The chromatogram is printed as it appearson the screen. If the graph has been normalized it will be printed in the normalizedview.
Print Setup
The Print Setup command allows you to configure the printer from within
SiteChart.
1. Open the File menu and select Print Setup (Alt, F, R).
2. Ensure the correct printer is selected and that it is configured correctly.
3. Select the size of the sheet on which the reports will be printed.
SiteChart reports have been designed to fit a letter or legal size sheet.
4. Select the paper orientation.
Reports can be printed in portrait or landscape.
The properties button opens another dialog box that provides more information
specific to the printer. Refer to your printer user’s manual for more information on
the settings in this dialog box.
Recent File 1, 2, 3, 4
Use the numbers and file names listed to open the last four files you used. Choose
the number that corresponds with the document you want to open. If the file has
been moved since it was last saved, SiteChart will display an error message. You
must then use the Open command to locate and open the file.
Exit
Choosing Exit will terminate SiteChart.
142

Explorer Operator Manual

To exit SiteChart:
1. From the File menu, choose Exit (Alt F, X or Alt F4).
If any changes have been, a warning window will open explaining theapplication will close and give you a chance to return to the program.
2. Click Yes to close SiteChart and save all files that have been changed, or click
No to close the application without saving.
If no changes have been made the application will close immediately.

View Menu
The View menu allows you to manipulate the display, turn on/off the status block,control the display font size, reintegrate the display, control the peak labels, update
the log listing, turn on/off the Status Bar and the Instrument Status display.
The View menu commands are also available by clicking the right mouse button on
the main graph area in any tab. A pop-up menu is displayed listing the relevant View
menu commands. Click on a command, with the left mouse button, to select it. To
remove the menu, click anywhere but on the menu bar.
Previous Zoom
This option displays the previous zoom of the display.
To zoom in on the display:
1. Click on the display, outside the area of interest, and drag the mouse over thearea of interest.
The rectangle created by dragging the mouse will be expanded to fill thecomplete display.
2. Continue zooming in as desired.
To zoom out on the display:
1. Click Previous Zoom.
2. Continue clicking on the Previous Zoom command as required.
143

SiteChart Software

3. To view the complete graph, click Auto Range.
Grid
The Grid command turns the reference grid on/off. The grid on the graph of thecurrent tab will be affected.
To turn the grid on/off, click Grid.
Auto Range
Auto Range will automatically select a range that is appropriate for the signal levelin the analysis.
If you have used the zoom feature to enlarge the graph, use Auto Range to view thecomplete graph.
Normalize
The Normalize command will scale the current view of the chromatogram so thatthe minimum signal is aligned with the bottom of the display, and the maximum
signal is aligned with the top of the display.
Select Auto Range to return to the full-scale view.
SmoothSmoothing effectively removes or reduces unwanted noise by averaging every pointon the signal with several points before and several points after. The result is a muchsmoother baseline and may result in better integration if noise was affecting peakdetection.
To smooth a chromatogram:
1. Open the chromatogram to be modified.
2. From the View menu, select Smooth.

144

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Select the amount of smoothing to be applied.
The signal will be smoothed and the modified chromatogram is displayed.
None provides no smoothing and 15 provides the maximum smoothing. If you
select 15, SiteChart averages 7 points before and 7 points after every point on
the baseline.
4. From the View menu, select Re-integrate.
If signal noise was affecting integration, signal smoothing will lead to moreaccurate integration.
5. Annotate the notes for this chromatogram, to show that the original file has
been modified, and then save it.
You can always return to the original chromatogram by setting smoothing toNone.
Status BlockThis command enables/disables the status block. The status block displays thesignal level and the slope of the signal at a time defined by the position of the crosshair. The cross hair does not need to be directly on the signal.
Font Size
Selects the font size for the labels on the graph. Automatic is always readable. It
adjusts the font size with the current view. Small, Medium, and Large allow you tocustomize the displayed font as required.
Re-integrate
The Re-integrate command recalculates the area of the peak using the new
integration parameters or new library information.
When you re-integrate, the integration method from the current assay is used. If an
assay has been loaded from another instrument, the serial number will notcorrespond to the analysis. SiteChart will display a warning message. You canoverride this message, but use caution. The reported results may be invalid.

145

SiteChart Software

Integration Method
The options in the Integration Method dialog box allow you to view or alter the
integration method. After you change any of the integration parameters, thechromatogram will automatically be re-integrated so you can see the effect of the
new integration values. The Integration Method is used to determine the compoundpeaks and calculate the peak area. All of these parameters are set as part of themethod. Refer to Integration Method on page 175 and the assay notes before
making changes to the integration method.
When Automatic Integration is enabled the software automatically selects the
Slope Up and Slope Down values and minimum height based on a sampling of thesignal at the start of a run. Ensure Automatic Integration is selected. Refer toIntegration Method on page 150 for details on the integration method before
adjusting any of the integration parameters.
Peak Labels
Peak Labels selects the peak labels that are displayed on the graph. None displays
no peak labels. The Numbers option will number each integrated peak. Labels will
display the peak name if the peak can be identified. Names and Numbers display anumber and the peak name.
Update Log Listing and Auto Update Log Listing
If the instrument is connected to the computer and is performing runs, completed
runs will be added to the current directory. If you are reviewing compound or log
data from the current directory, SiteChart will update your listing whenever a run isadded to the directory. This could be a time consuming task if you have a long list of
files. To prevent the list from being updated automatically, you can disable thisfeature.
To disable the Auto Update feature:
1. Open the View menu and select Auto Update Log Listing.
The check mark will disappear and new runs will be logged to the computer
but will not be added to the listing.

146

Explorer Operator Manual

2. To manually update your listing, open the View menu and select Update Log
Listing.
Enable the Auto Update Log Listing feature if you need to maintain a current log orcompound review listing.
While the computer is trying to update compound or log review listings it may lose
communication with the instrument. If this happens SiteChart will display a message
indicating that it has lost its connection to the instrument and will immediately
attempt to re-establish communications with the computer. To avoid this, disable
Auto Update Log Listing and update the compound and log review listings
manually.
Status Bar
The Status Bar command shows or hides the status bar. The status bar is located at
the bottom of the screen and displays the status of the application. Three windows
on the far right of the bar indicate the status of the scroll lock, the num lock and thecaps lock keys.
You can view a brief description of each SiteChart option in the status bar. The
Status Bar must be turned on. Point at any menu or menu item and hold down theleft mouse button. To avoid activating the button, continue to press the mousebutton. Drag the mouse pointer away from the menu or menu item and then release
the mouse button.
Turn the status bar off to provide more viewing area.
Instrument Status
The Instrument Status command shows or hides the instrument status display in
the Instrument tab. Close the instrument status block to enlarge the view of thechromatogram and the peak report.

147

SiteChart Software

Analyzer Menu
Setup
The Setup command allows you to enter a tag and provides access to the auto cycle
settings.
A tag may be used to identify a certain sampling location or a certain sample in the
datalogger. You can enter a tag to indicate a change of location, a change inpersonnel or a change in method.
To enter a tag:
1. Open the Analyzer menu and select Setup.
2. Enter a tag.
The tag can use up to 10 characters.
3. Click OK to confirm the tag.
The tag you enter here will identify both GC and TVOC analyses. You can enter a
new tag for every analysis or you can enter a single tag for a group of analyses.
Auto Cycling Operation
Auto operation allows you to set up Explorer to take samples automatically. You
must use loop injections for auto analyzing. If more than one column is required tocomplete an analysis, then each column will be sampled in order. If each column
has different chromatographic settings, Explorer will adjust its settings between
analyses. You can also configure the instrument to perform a preset number ofanalyses.

148

Explorer Operator Manual

Auto cycling is the only way to cycle through multiple columns as required for ananalysis if you are operating Explorer from SiteChart. If you click Start on theInstrument tab or select the Start and Stop commands from the Analyzer menu,
SiteChart will begin an analysis on the selected column. If you click Start again,
the analysis will again be on the selected column. To switch columns, you mustselect another column and then click Start.
To configure your instrument for auto cycling operation:
1. Ensure Explorer is set up correctly. Carrier gas must be supplied to the
instrument. It must be displaying a ready status.
2. Select the Assay tab and ensure the correct assay is loaded.
3. Select the Instrument tab and select the column on which to begin auto cycling.
4. Open the Analyzer menu and select the column or right-click on the column
graphic in the instrument status box to open a column selection pop-up menu.
5. Connect a sample to the sample inlet port or allow Explorer to draw a sample
of room air.
6. Open the Analyzer menu and select Setup.
7. Enter a delay time.
This is the time between runs. A minimum delay of 1 minute is required toenable Explorer to stabilize the baseline.
8. Enter the number of runs required.
If your method requires all three columns and you need 2 complete analyses,
enter 6. After 6 runs, 2 on each column, Explorer will turn auto analyzing off.
If you want the instrument to sample continuously enter 0. If you are analyzing
continuously, ensure that you have connected Explorer to the AC adapter andan external supply of carrier gas. Check the Auto Cycle box and then click OK.
Explorer will begin auto cycling.

149SiteChart Software

If you have selected a preset number of runs to be performed, SiteChart willturn off the auto cycling option when it has completed the runs. If you are
cycling Explorer continuously, you must turn auto cycling off from theAnalyzer menu.
9. In the Analyzer menu, select Setup. De-select the Auto Cycle check box andclick OK.
Auto cycling will stop when the analysis in progress is complete.
Integration Method
The options in the Integration Method dialog box allow you to view or alter the
integration method. After you change any of the integration parameters, thechromatogram will automatically be re-integrated so you can see the effect of the
new integration values. The Integration Method is used to determine the compoundpeaks and calculate the peak area. All of these parameters are set as part of themethod. Refer to Integration Method on page 175 and the assay notes before
making changes to the integration method.
When Automatic Integration is enabled the software automatically selects the
Slope Up and Slope Down values and minimum height based on a sampling of thesignal at the start of a run. Ensure Automatic Integration is selected.
Parameter

150

Description

Slope Up

The minimum slope required to start a peak.

Slope Down

The minimum slope required to stop a peak.

Minimum Height

Any peak with a height less than the minimum
height will not be included in the peak report.

Minimum Area

Any peak with an area less than the minimum area
will not be included in the peak report.

Explorer Operator Manual

Integration Delay

Delays the start of the timer. Any peak eluting
before the timer starts will not be included in thepeak report.

Filter Level

Determines the amount of filtering to apply to thesignal. Filter 1 provides the most filtering.

ColumnThe Column command allows you to select the column for the next run on
Explorer. The selected column will remain enabled until it is de-selected. This
command over-rides the column sampling sequence on the instrument and forces
the run to be performed on the column selected here. The run will be performed
using the chromatographic settings for the selected column as set by the current
assay.
Start and Stop
The Start command starts a Explorer run. Before beginning a run, ensure Explorer
has been set up correctly. Carrier gas must be supplied to the instrument.
To stop the analysis before it is complete, use the Stop command. If you stopped theanalysis after the sample was injected onto the column you must wait for theduration of the analysis time for the column to be flushed before beginning anotheranalysis on the same column. When you stop an analysis, Explorer will begin toflush the column and move to the next column.
Calibrate
The Calibrate command calibrates Explorer using the last analysis.
To calibrate the instrument:
1. Perform a run on the first column required by the assay.
The run must include all library compounds specific to the selected column.
Refer to the assay notes supplied with your assay for details.

151

SiteChart Software

2. When the run is complete, review the chromatogram and peak report to ensurethat all compounds have been detected and that the reported concentrations arecorrect.
3. Select the Assay tab and ensure all library concentrations are correct.
4. Open the Analyzer menu and select Calibrate.
SiteChart will calibrate Explorer. The Explorer library will be updated
accordingly. Explorer is now calibrated and ready for operation.
The information in the SiteChart library will not be updated. Each time you
load a new assay and download it to the instrument, you must calibrate theinstrument in order to update the current library information.
Service
The Service command displays a window that shows the Explorer display. Thiscan be used to troubleshoot instrument problems remotely. This command allows
you to access all Explorer functions from your computer.
NOTE: Explorer cannot be powered up from this window. If Explorer is powered down, thenyou must turn it on by pressing the On/Off button on the instrument.
The buttons control Explorer in the same manner as the keys on Explorer.

Communication Menu
The Communications menu allows you to setup communications between thecomputer and the instrument.
The communication pull-down menu has the following options:Setup allows you to configure which serial port will be used to connect the

instrument to the remote computer.
Dial Out allows you to dial out to the specified number and establish

communication with a remote computer. This feature will allow you to dial out
to a remote instrument from SiteChart.

152

Explorer Operator Manual
Alarm Dial sets the computer, controlling Explorer, to dial a second computerin the event of an alarm or fault condition.

Hang Up terminates the modem session that is currently in progress.

SiteChart can connect to one Explorer. In order to connect two instruments, youmust run two copies of SiteChart. You will also need a second serial port. If you
do not need to control two instruments at the same time, you may want to connect
one instrument to the computer, download the information, disconnect it and thenconnect the second instrument.
Connecting Multiple Instruments
1. Start SiteChart and connect the communications cable to the first Explorer.
2. Open the Communications menu and select Setup.
3. Select the serial port to which the first Explorer is connected.
4. Ensure the first instrument is communicating with SiteChart.
5. Start another copy of SiteChart and connect the communications cable to thesecond Explorer.
6. Open the Communications menu and select Setup.
7. Select the serial port to which the second Explorer is connected.
8. Ensure the second instrument is communicating with SiteChart.
SiteChart was designed to accept data from multiple instruments so the log directory
is divided into sub-directories. Each sub-directory will correspond to information
received from a single instrument. These sub-directories are created using the
instrument serial numbers. For example, if one instrument has the serial number“123”, then all the information received from this instrument will be recorded in a
sub-directory of the data directory called “123”. The path would be C:\Program
Files\SiteChart\Data\123\filename.PID.

153

SiteChart Software

Remote Connection Hardware Configuration
This option allows you to setup Explorer at the monitoring site. You will setup thecomputer at a remote location and communicate with the Explorer through amodem. You must have a modem for Explorer and another modem for thecomputer. A modem capable of transmitting at 9600 baud is required. A fastermodem is recommended.
To configure your system for remote communication:
1. Connect the modem to the Explorer using the communication cable (Part No.
MX380304 with 4253000).
2. Turn Explorer on and ensure carrier gas is connected or that the internal
reservoir is full.
3. Connect the modem to the phone line.
4. Ensure the modem is turned on and is working properly.
5. Connect the second modem to a serial port on the computer.
If you need to add another serial port, refer to the computer’s manual for
detailed instructions.
NOTE: The modem must be connected to a serial port.
6. In the Communication menu, select Setup.
The Setup command allows you to configure the computer to communicate
with Explorer either directly or through a modem.
7. Select the serial port to which the modem is connected.
8. Connect the modem to the phone line.
9. Ensure the modem is turned on and is working properly.

154

Explorer Operator Manual

Initiating Remote Communications
1. Enter the phone number at which the Explorer and its modem are connected.
You can type parentheses and dashes, but they are not required. Type commas
to provide any delays required before the number is processed by the telephonesystem.
If you are using a HayesTM compatible modem with the default settings, eachcomma inserts a delay of approximately 2 seconds.
If you are not using a HayesTM compatible modem, the delays and thecharacters that create the delays may be different. Refer to the modem user’s
manual.
2. Press the Dial button to initiate communication.
3. Monitor the modem status in the Dial Out dialog box. When the modem has
successfully connected with Explorer, you can close the dialog box.
4. Select the Instrument tab and check the instrument status box.
The current values from Explorer will be displayed.
You can now control the instrument from the computer. You can turn Explorer
off from the computer but you cannot turn it on again. Explorer must be powered
up from the local keypad by pressing the On/Off key.
Terminating Communication
When you are ready to terminate communication with Explorer:
Open the Communication menu and select Hang up.
SiteChart will issue the command to the modem and disconnect the modem
from the telephone line.
You can also click Hang Up in the Dial Out dialog box. You can see themodem status messages in this dialog box.
You can turn Explorer off from the computer but you cannot turn it on again.
Explorer must be powered up from the local keypad by pressing the On/Off key.

155

SiteChart Software

Alarm Dial
You can setup the computer to dial out to a remote computer if an alarm or fault
condition is encountered.
If the computer is connected directly to Explorer you must connect a modem toa free serial port in order to use this feature.
If you are controlling Explorer from a remote location, you will need a second
modem connected to a free serial port on the computer. Ensure the modems
are connected and configured correctly.
To configure your system to dial out on an alarm condition:
1. Select Alarm Dial from the Communications menu.
2. Enter the telephone number to which the computer should dial if an alarm or
fault condition is encountered.
3. Select the port to which the modem is connected.
If Explorer is connected directly to the computer this will be the modem port. If
you are controlling Explorer from a remote location, this will be the second
modem port.
4. Check Dial on Alarm or Dial on Fault condition or both as required.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
If any of the conditions you selected occur, the computer will dial out to the preset
number. SiteChart will try to establish communication and send a message
indicating that an alarm or fault has occurred. Test the feature to ensure allconnections are correct and that all information has been entered correctly.

156

Explorer Operator Manual

Help Menu
To get help quickly as you work, press the F1 key. When the Help window appears
you can display a procedure for a particular task, or see information about any
command.
You can view Help side by side with a window in which you are working so thatboth windows remain visible while you work.
The Help index provides an index of available Help topics. Select the desired topic
and it will be displayed in the Help window. You can get context-sensitive Help as
you work. For example if you are in the Save As dialog box, press F1 to display
Help information about the options.
If you have a question about SiteChart and cannot find the answer in this manual orin the on-line Help, you can contact INFICON Technical Support for assistance. If
you call, you should be sitting in front of your computer with SiteChart running andthe chromatogram in question open on the screen. You should also have this manualat hand.
Whether you call or write, please provide the following information:
The version number of Windows and the version number of SiteChart.
In the Help menu, select the About command to determine the software version
number.
The type of hardware you are using, including network hardware, if applicable.
A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem
occurred.
The exact wording of any messages that appear on the screen.
Explorer’s serial number.

157

SiteChart Software

Help Topics
When Help Topics is selected, you can choose to view the contents of the help fileor to look at an index.
To view the on-line help:
1. Selecting contents will display a list of SiteChart menus and tabs.
2. Double-click on the menu or tab for which you need more information.
A Help window will open providing basic information about the topic.
If Index is selected, another window will open which lists an index of the help
file. Enter the topic for which you require help and click Display.
If you are running Windows 95 you also have the option to generate a databaselisting of the help file. This allows you to search for information using words andphrases rather than by category.
1. Select the Find command and create the database.
2. Create the database to minimize size, maximize search capabilities orcustomize the process. Refer to the Windows documentation for more details.
About SiteChart
About SiteChart displays the SiteChart software version number. You will need toknow the version number if you are calling INFICON Technical Support for
information about SiteChart.

158

Method
Development

5

Method Development

Method Development Using SiteChart
Assay development can be approached in two ways: first, you can develop a custom
assay based on the compounds that are included as part of the assay that has been
shipped with your instrument. Second, you can develop your own library ofcompounds.
If you use the first method, all the required chromatographic settings for eachcompound are stored and the only steps required are selecting the compounds ofinterest and calibrating the instrument. Each library listing has been setup for a
specific application. The compound groups and the associated chromatographic
settings have been selected to obtain the best results. Refer to the assay notes fordetails.
If you use the second method, you have complete control of the GC. You can adjust
any of the chromatographic settings, such as temperature and flow rate and optimize
the analysis for your compounds of interest. However, you must enter all yourcompound information, as the information in the reference library becomes invalid.
Once your method has been entered you can save it and update the information asnecessary.

Library
The library is specific to an assay. If you have obtained Assay 1, for example, then
you will have a library of approximately 40 compounds from which you can develop
your custom assay. The library is loaded as part of the assay.
A library is supplied for each column/detector pair required for the assay. The
number of libraries is determined by the assay. The compound information in thelibraries has been determined by the standard method. The libraries are always
available on the assay disk so you can use the original method and the informationin the reference library.

160

Explorer Operator Manual

If your chromatographic settings have not changed from the original assay, but
library compounds are not correctly identified or not identified at all, they may havedrifted out of the peak recognition window. You can update library information
based on a recent chromatogram that has been run using the original assay. See
Compound Library on page 109. Changes made to the current library are not madeto the reference library.

Column Selection
Each assay contains three columns. Each column has a library of compounds andtheir associated chromatographic information. Refer to the assay notes to determine
which is the best column on which to run your compounds. If the compounds ofinterest must be run on two columns, you must perform two runs to complete ananalysis and two runs to calibrate the instrument. See Column/Detector Selection
on page 105.
An ECD is available for Explorer that is configured for Assay 1. You must have the
ECD installed to access the ECD options. In the Instrument tab, select the PID, theECD or both.
You can set the PID to high sensitivity for low concentrations, or for compounds
that do not respond well to a PID. Select low sensitivity for high concentrations.
The PID sensitivity is equivalent to the detector gain. See Detector State on page 174
for details or setting the PID sensitivity. Refer to the assay notes for guidelines on
setting the gain.
To select the required column/detector combination:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. Select the desired column/detector pair from the drop-down box.
The library for the selected column will be displayed in the library box.
Any changes you make to the method apply to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column/detector
pair and make the necessary changes.

161

Method Development

Adding Compounds to the Library
One compound library is supplied for each column/detector pair, as part of eachassay. These libraries have been determined for the assay standard method.
If the method is modified, a new library must be created, identifying the compoundswith their new retention times. You must run an analysis of the compounds and then
add them to the library.
Adding Compounds
1. Select the Assay Tab.
2. Optimize the method for your compounds. If your method requires more than
one column/detector combination, optimize the chromatography for eachcolumn/detector pair.
Refer to the assay notes to determine which chromatographic settings will
provide the best separation for your compounds.
3. Save the new assay.
NOTE: When the method is changed, the reference libraries are no longer valid and willautomatically be deleted from the assay.
4. Ensure Explorer is on and ready for operation and then send the information to
Explorer by clicking Send to Explorer.
5. Connect a sample to the Sample In port and begin a run.
6. When the analysis is complete, select the Assay tab. If necessary zoom in on
the chromatogram to view the peaks.
7. Double-click on the first peak that you want to add or click Add in the Librarybox.
A dialog box opens.
8. Enter the correct name and concentration.
Limit your compound name to 20 characters. Note that Explorer will display
only 15 characters of the compound name.
162

Explorer Operator Manual

9. Review the data in the library information box. Compounds present in thecalibration gas must be selected for calibration. Compounds not present in thecalibration gas must be removed.
NOTE: All compounds contained in the library must be contained in the calibration gas.
10. Ensure you have entered the correct calibration concentration.
This is the concentration of the compound in your calibration gas.
11. Select whether you want the concentration averaged over multiple calibration
runs.
See Calibration Averaging on page 114 for details.
12. Enter an Alarm level.
13. Enter the Window percent.
The Window Percent is the deviation in retention time for which Explorer willcompensate. For example, if the window is set at 5%, a compound with aretention time of 100 seconds will still be identified if it elutes between 95 and105 seconds.
14. Select how you want the peak identified: as the Largest peak in the window oras the Closest retention time in the library.
If there are interference compounds, that appear at the same retention time, but
are not as responsive to the PID or are present in very low concentrations, thenselect Largest peak in the window. If the interference compound is close indetector response, but has a different retention time, then select closest
retention time.
15. Select the desired Curve Fit option.
See Calibration Curve on page 115 for details.
16. If possible run the compound at more than one concentration. Use Store to
store up to five concentration values for a compound. Best response results will
be obtained this way.
See Multiple Point Calibration Curve on page 165 for details.

163

Method Development

17. Double-click on the next peak in the chromatogram or click Add in the Librarybox and enter the information as outlined above. Repeat this process for all
peaks in the chromatogram.
18. Once all the peak information has been entered, move the mouse to the graphand click the right mouse button. Select re-integrate from the pop-up menu
that opens.
The chromatogram will be re-integrated using the new library information.
19. If your compounds of interest require another column/detector option, selectthe next column/detector pair and run another analysis.
20. Store the compounds as described above. Repeat this procedure for a thirdcolumn/detector pair if necessary.
Saving the New Assay
Save the assay file so that you do not lose any of your changes. Save the assay witha new name so that you do not overwrite the original assay.
To save a newly created assay:
1. From the File menu select Save As (Alt, F, A). If you are updating a file you
use the Save option (Alt, F, S).
2. Enter a name for the assay.
The file will be saved as a SiteChart assay with the extension .app.
3. Select whether or not you want the file created as a read-only file.
4. Click Save.

164

Explorer Operator Manual

Multiple Point Calibration Curve
Multiple point calibration will provide the most accurate response. If you have a gas
dilutor or you have standards at more than one concentration, store multiple points
to get a more accurate calibration curve.
To create a multiple point calibration curve:
1. Select the Assay Tab.
2. Select the column/detector combination required for your compound. Ensure
your compound is already listed in the library.
3. Ensure Explorer is on and ready for operation.
4. Connect a sample to the Sample In port and begin a run.
5. When the analysis is complete, select the Assay tab. Open the file that was justrun.
The chromatogram will be displayed in the window
6. Double-click on the peak in the chromatogram and enter the concentration.
Normally, you will use a linear calibration curve.
7. Select Linear and SiteChart will update the calibration curve to incorporate thenew point.
8. If you have more than one compound at a different concentration then repeat
the procedure for the other peaks in the chromatogram.
9. Perform another run at another concentration and store the compound. Repeat
this procedure for all available concentrations.
10. If you need to remove a concentration point, select the point in thearea/concentration table and click Erase.
During calibration, the single point that is contained in the calibration gas isused to update the curve.
165

Method Development

Analysis Settings
Developing your own method allows you to optimize the system for your particularapplication. If, for example you want to run benzene, toluene and m-xylene (BTX)as quickly as possible you can increase the pressure, increase the temperature anddecrease the analysis time.
When you make any changes to the analysis settings, the reference library will be
invalid. The retention times for library compounds become invalid when you change
any of the analysis parameters. The reference library is still available on the disk
supplied with the instrument. It will not be accessible from SiteChart unless you
load it from the disk again.
You may have to perform a few runs in order to optimize your method. Once you
have obtained well-separated peaks at the desired analysis time then you can store
the compounds in the library.
Analysis Time
Analysis time is the duration of the analysis. You must set the analysis time so that
all compounds of interest clear the column and pass into the detector. Refer to theassay notes to determine the correct analysis time for your application.
To set the analysis time:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box, click Config.
The Configure dialog is displayed.

166

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Enter the desired Analysis Time and click OK to accept the change and closethe dialog box.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the analysis time.
4. Save the assay.
Backflush TimeThe analysis time consists of the foreflush time and the backflush time. During
foreflush the sample is injected onto the column and is allowed to clear theprecolumn. When the compounds of interest have cleared the precolumn, backflush
begins. Set the backflush time so that all your compounds of interest clear theprecolumn. Perform a few runs to ensure that compounds of interest enter the
analytical column, but contaminant compounds are backflushed.
You can enter the backflush time as a function of the other method parameters. By
entering as a function, the backflush time will be updated accordingly when any of
the function parameters are changed. Enter the backflush time as a function ofanalysis time (A), pump time (P), injection time (I) . For example backflush time =(A+P)/3. If the analysis time or pump time are modified the backflush time is also
updated.
To set the backflush time:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box, click Config.
3. Click Inject.
The Injection dialog is displayed.

167

Method Development

4. Enter the desired Backflush time and click OK to accept the change and closethe dialog boxes.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the backflush time.
5. Save the assay.
Pump TimeThe Pump Time is the duration the pump draws sample through the SAMPLE IN
port to flush and fill the sample loop. Set the pump time so that the sample loop isallowed to flush with the sample before the sample is injected.
When Explorer changes the PID sensitivity (gain), it must monitor and change theoffset. This occurs during the pump time. Explorer begins to adjust the offset at
about 8-10 seconds into the pump time. Typical setting for the pump time do notallow sufficient time for baseline stabilization after the extreme changes in offset
that occur during gain switching.
If it is necessary to switch gains between runs, set the pump times to at least 20
seconds. Use typical times of 10 to 15 seconds when no gain switching is required.
To change the detector sensitivity:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box, click Config.
3. Click Inject in the Configure dialog box.
168

Explorer Operator Manual

4. Ensure Loop is selected and enter the desired Pump Time.
5. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog boxes.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the pump time.
6. Save the assay.
Injection Type
Samples can be introduced by automatic loop injection or by manual syringe
injection. If you select loop injection you must also set an injection time. Injection
time determines how long the loop will be in line with the column and in turn whatvolume will be injected onto the column. The injected volume will also depend on
the flow rate. For example, setting the injection time to 10 seconds, at a pressure of
15 psi, will inject the entire contents of the sample loop onto the column.
Explorer is a very sensitive instrument. It is easy to overload the column anddetector by injecting a sample that is too large. Normally, you will set the
injection time to between 0.4 and 2 seconds. The flow rate and injection time will
determine the volume of sample injected from the 0.5 ml sample loop.
Explorer is not designed to accept liquid injections, so water samples areanalyzed using the headspace above standards. You may obtain commerciallyprepared standards or you can prepare the headspace standards.

Do not inject liquid samples into Explorer or you will damage it.
CAUTION169

Method Development

To select the injection method:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box click Config.
3. Click Inject in the Configure dialog box.
4. Select Loop or Syringe.
5. If you selected Loop, ensure the correct pump time and inject time have beenentered.
OR
If you have selected Syringe injection, enter the injection volume.
This information is for report purposes only. You will determine the actual
injection volume at the time of injection.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog boxes.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the injection method.
7. Save the assay.
Injection Volume
The injection volume (syringe) is for report purposes only. You will control theactual injection volume, with the syringe, at the time of the injection. Use themicroliter syringe supplied with the calibration kit (Part No. MX380310) to
inject small volumes. Explorer is a very sensitive instrument. It is easy to overload
the column and detector by injecting a sample that is too large.

170

Explorer Operator Manual

To set the injection volume:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box, click Config.
3. Click Inject in the Configure dialog box.
4. Ensure Syringe is selected.
5. Enter the Inject volume.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog boxes.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the injection volume.
7. Save the assay.
NOTE: Explorer is not designed to accept liquid injections, so water samples are analyzed
using the headspace above standards. You may obtain commercially preparedstandards or you can prepare the headspace standards.

Do not inject liquid samples into Explorer or you will damage it.
CAUTION171

Method Development

Oven Temperature
In isothermal operation the columns and the PID are maintained at a fixed
temperature. Retention time drift is virtually eliminated and faster analysis results
are obtained with less frequent calibration.
The smaller the difference between ambient temperature and instrument operating
temperature of the column, the quicker the column will reach thermal equilibrium
and the lower the power consumption will be. However, if a temperature difference
is too small, the ambient temperature may increase above that of the column and thecolumn will no longer be under isothermal control. An Oven Temp fault will be
displayed.
You can set the temperature to between 0 and 80 C. Set the temperature to 0 to turnthe oven off.
NOTE: Do not set the temperature to below 50 C, as samples may condense on the column
and contaminate your system.
To set the oven temperature:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box, click Config.
3. Enter the desired Oven temperature.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the temperature.
5. Save the assay.
NOTE: If you have entered different temperatures for each column, Explorer will require
30 minutes between analyses for the column to reach temperature equilibrium.

172

Explorer Operator Manual

ECD Temperature
The ECD temperature can be set independently of the column and the PID. The
ECD must be maintained at a temperature greater than or equal to the column/PID
temperature.
NOTE: Do not set the ECD temperature less than the column temperature. It is possible thesample could condense and contaminate the radioactive foil contained in the ECD.
To set the ECD temperature:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box, click Config.
3. Enter the desired ECD Oven temperature.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog boxes.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the injection volume.
5. Save the assay.
NOTE: If you have entered different ECD temperatures for each column method, Explorer
will require 30 minutes between analyses for the ECD to reach temperatureequilibrium.
Pressure
When adjusting the carrier gas flow rates ensure the flow through the detector ismaintained at a constant rate. Variations in the detector flow will result in baseline
instability, especially with high sensitivity applications. After you change thepressure, allow a few minutes for the flow through the columns to stabilize. You can
set the pressure to any value between 8 and 14 psi.
To set the column pressure:
1. Select the Assay tab.
173

Method Development

2. In the Method box, click Config.
3. Enter the desired Pressure.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog boxes.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the pressure.
5. Save the assay.
Detector StateAn ECD is available for Explorer configured for Assay 1. You must have the
ECD installed to access the ECD options. In the Instrument tab, select the PID,
the ECD or both.
You can set the PID to high sensitivity for low concentrations, or for compounds
that do not respond well to a PID. Select low sensitivity for high concentrations.
To change the detector sensitivity:
1. Select the Assay tab.
2. In the Method box, click Config.
3. Enter the desired PID State and/or ECD State.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog boxes.
The change you have made applies to the currently selected column only. If
you need to change the setting for another column, select the next column andchange the detector state.
5. Save the assay.

174

Explorer Operator Manual

When Explorer changes the PID sensitivity (gain), it must monitor and change theoffset. This occurs during the pump time. Explorer begins to adjust the offset at
about 8-10 seconds into the pump time. Typical setting for the pump time do notallow sufficient time for baseline stabilization after the extreme changes in offset
that occur during gain switching.
If it is necessary to switch gains between runs, set the pump times to at least 20.
Use typical times of 10 to 15 seconds when no gain switching is required. See page
193 for details on setting the pump time.

Integration Method
General Information
The integrator extracts information from the detector signal. The integrator has been
designed to reduce or eliminate the user input required for good chromatographic
integration.
Chromatographic peaks are identified according to the following recognition
sequence based on the slope of the signal coming from the detector. The integrator
looks for each step to occur in sequence.
To detect a peak the integrator goes through the following steps:
1. The slope exceeds a threshold value for a certain time period.
When this occurs, the peak has started.
2. The slope goes negative for a time period.
This indicates the peak maximum has been detected.
3. At this point the height of the peak can be calculated.
If it is greater than the Minimum Height value in the Integration Method thenthe sequence is continued, otherwise the peak is disregarded and the integrator
goes back to step 1.
4. The slope, now negative, rises above a threshold value for a certain time
period.
The end of the peak has been detected.
175

Method Development

Peak retention times are measured when the slope changes from positive to negative(the peak maxima).
Peak areas are calculated by summing the area slices beneath the signal andsubtracting the area below the line connecting the start and end points.
If Automatic Integration is enabled, Explorer will enter the values automaticallyin the Integration Method dialog box in the Analyzer menu. You can enter the
Up/Down Slope and Minimum Height values if automatic integration is disabled.
The slope is calculated from a five point moving average and is compared with theeffective Up and Down Slope sensitivities to start and stop the integrator.
To set up the integration, select Integration Method from the Analyzer menu.
The Integration Method dialog is displayed.

Automatic Integration
For most analyses automatic integration will give the best results. If, however, thesignal is not representative during the five second period, then the peak recognition
factors Up Slope, Down Slope and Minimum Height may not be calculated correctly
for the chromatogram. In this case it may be necessary to set the integration
parameters manually.
The choice of initial Up/Down Slope and Filter can require some expertise. Explorer
automates this procedure as the Up/Down Slope, Minimum Height, and Filter
options are set automatically if automatic integration is enabled.

176

Explorer Operator Manual

These parameters are calculated on the basis of signal noise sampling during thefirst five seconds of an analysis. During the first five seconds of an analysis,
Explorer samples the signal at a frequency of approximately 15 Hz. The integrator
uses linear regression to determine the best line through these sample points. The
sample scatter is then used to determine the Minimum Height. The slope of eachgroup of five sample points is then calculated. The scatter of the slopes is used todetermine the Up and Down Slope sensitivities.
Up/Down Slope
The slope of the signal is calculated once each averaging period as a weighted
average of the slopes from 2 periods behind and two periods ahead. This is the 5
point moving average.
To start the integrator, the calculated slope must exceed the Up Slope settings once
and then remain greater than the half of the Up Slope (>Up Slope/2) setting for the
next four averaging periods. The integrator looks for four consecutive points so thatnoise is not mistaken for a peak.
For example: if the Up slope sensitivity has been set to 2 mV/S then Explorer looks
for a slope greater than or equal to 2 mV/S. When it finds a slope greater than orequal to this value, then it looks for four more consecutive positive slopes. If it
finds them, then it returns to the initial slope greater than 2 mV/S and sets this at
the integration start point.
The integrator locates the peak maximum and the retention time by looking for the
first negative slopes and then four more negative slopes. Once it has data that meetthe criteria, it goes back and assigns the first negative slope as the peak maxima andassigns this point as the retention time.
The integrator is stopped if five consecutive slopes are more positive than the Down
slope setting. The integrator is looking for a flattening trend. If Down Slope is set to
2 mV/S this is effectively -2 mV/S. The integrator is looking for a slope of -2 mV/S
and then four more slopes greater than or equal to -2 mV/S.
If peaks are not being integrated properly, the slope settings may be adjusted toprovide more accurate integration. If the peak is ending too soon, decrease the Down
Slope setting so that the integrator is looking for a smaller slope. If the end of thepeak cannot be found, then increase the Down Slope setting.
177

Method Development

Minimum Height
The Minimum Height is required for comparison in the basic peak recognition
sequence. Although single Up/Down Slope and Minimum Height values are
displayed the integrator will operate on the same data with four different filters
simultaneously since it does not know critical information such as peak widths. It
then selects the best result based on identifying the maximum number of significant
peaks.
Set the minimum height based on the detector response to the smallest peak. Peaks
that do not meet the minimum height will not be integrated and thus will not be
included in the peak report.
Minimum Area
Set the minimum area based on the detector response to the smallest peak. Peaks
that do not meet the minimum area will not be included in the peak report. These
two options are used to eliminate baseline disruptions that have been mistakenly
identified as compound peaks.
Integration Delay
Use the integration delay option to delay the start of the integration timer. Thiscan be useful if your analysis contains more than 25 peaks. SiteChart andExplorer can identify 25 compounds at a time. If you are interested in the first 25
peaks set the delay time to 0. If you are interested in peaks that elute later in theanalysis, set the delay to 60 seconds, or an appropriate delay for your analysis
time, so that the first peaks are ignored and the 25 peaks eluting after 60 seconds
will be identified and displayed.
If you need to identify all the peaks in the run, then set the delay to 0 and print ananalysis report. Then set the delay to 60, or an appropriate delay for your analysis
time and re-integrate the run. Then, print another analysis report.
If you are using a PID with nitrogen carrier gas, you will see a negative peak due tooxygen in your sample. Set the integration delay so that the timer begins after thisnegative peak. If you are using the ECD this oxygen peak will be positive.

178

Explorer Operator Manual

FilterSince baseline noise is constant throughout the chromatogram, the reduced slope
sensitivities may allow false noise peaks to be detected. To reduce these effects, theintegrator filters the signal by averaging the signal over larger periods while
reducing the slope sensitivities. This allows the signal to noise ratio to remain
constant throughout an analysis giving good integration on both early and late peaks.
It is not possible to select a single filter that will work ideally under all conditions,because of variations in carrier flow and column temperature in a GC. If data are tooheavily filtered, adjacent peaks will not be resolved, while if too lightly filtered,noise creates unwanted peaks. In either case the quality of the integration will suffer.
Filter 1 provides the most filtering with the signal being averaged over the longest
period before the slope is calculated. Filter 4 provides the most versatility; the signal
is analyzed simultaneously by four different filters.
The highest filter level is used to detect the start of each peak. Once a peak isdetected 1, 2, 3 or 4 of the other filters (depending on the Filter selected) will
operate on the same data until they detect integration stop points.
The end result is detection of large peaks since all data are heavily filtered as well as
good resolution of small peaks since all data are also analyzed with relatively little
filtering. When the signal noise is low, select Filter 4. For noisier signals, selectlower Filter numbers. Filter 4 also provides better resolution for co-eluting peaks.
Merged Peaks
Merged peaks are separated in one of two ways. Explorer will draw either adiagonal or vertical line depending on where the peaks overlap.
Again, as with normal peaks, when the integration stops, the area below the baseline
is subtracted and the resulting peak areas are stored for calculation.

179

Method Development

Sometimes a peak is discovered which trails off the falling edge of a much larger
peak. In this case dropping a perpendicular baseline would overestimate the area ofthe second peak. To compensate for this, a simple baseline, directly connecting thestart and stop points of the second peak is used. The area beneath the baseline isallocated to the preceding (or primary) peak. The method of drawing in the baseline
for the second peak is called a tangent skim. The criteria for skimming a peak are:Equation 1:

t1/t2 > 4

Equation 2:

H1/H2 > 2

where t = the time between the peak maxima and the valley between the two peaks
and H = the height of the peak.
Setting Integration Parameters
To set the peak recognition factors:
1. Select Integration Method from the Analyzer menu.
The Integration Method dialog is displayed.

2. The Slope Up factor determines what the integration start point will be.
If Up Slope is set to 6 mV/S, then the integrator will look for the signal level torise at a rate of for 6 mV/S one sample and at least 3 mV/S for four samples.
Up Slope can be any value from 0.1 to 99 mV/S. Typically values between 0.5
and 5 mV/S are used.

180

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Enter a value for the Slope Down sensitivity.
The Down Slope factor sets the point where the integration will end anddetermine the area under the peak. This value can also range from 0.1 to 99.
Again typical values are set between 0.5 and 5 mV/S.
The Up and Down Slope sensitivities set here will be used by Explorer as
default values. If Auto is selected Explorer will select its own values based on
the best results it can obtain for the current analysis. These values depend on
the amount of baseline noise and may change for every chromatogram.
4. The Integration Delay is used to delay the start of integration after the analysis
begins. It is used to prevent integration of peaks which may appear as a resultof pressure changes during sample injection, especially when large syringe
injections are made. If there are no pressure peaks, set the integrator delay tozero. If you have more than 25 peaks in an analysis, integrator delay may be
used to determine which 25 peaks will be identified. If you are interested in thepeaks in the middle or at the end of the chromatogram, set the integrator delay
so that the first peaks are not used.
5. The Minimum Area is the minimum integrated area that must be detected inorder for Explorer to identify a compound and put it in the Peak Report. Whencreating a method set the Minimum Area Factor to 0 initially so that all peaks
will be identified.
Peaks that do not meet the minimum area requirements will be labeled
Unknown.
6. The Minimum Height is the minimum peak height that will be accepted as asample peak.
This factor allows the integrator to eliminate peaks due to noise.
If manual integration is being used adjust the Minimum Height up or downfrom the value set by the integrator to obtain the desired results.

181

Method Development

7. Filter 1 provides the most filtering with the signal being averaged over the
longest period before the slope is calculated. Filter 4 provides the mostversatility; the signal is analyzed simultaneously by four different filters.
The filter with the highest filtering is used to detect the start of each peak. Oncea peak is detected, 0, 1, 2, or 3 of the other filters (depending on the Filter
selected) will operate on the same data until they detect integration stop points.
8. The displayed chromatogram will be automatically re-integrated using the new
settings.

Assay Properties
Assay properties provide access to the features that complete the development of anassay. These properties will be set as part of your assay. You will only need tochange these parameters if you are creating your own assay.
Assay Notes
Assay notes are displayed when you open an assay. The notes allow you to enter abrief description of the assay. Normally you will list the intended application. You
can also add any warnings or limitations of usage as required.
Serial Number
Assays are normally created for a single instrument. Although method information
may be transferred from one instrument to another, variations in retention time andresponse may result in lower sensitivity or compound misidentification.
Assays are created for specific instruments. When you have created an assay you
can link the assay to a specific instrument. This information will be saved as part of
the assay. If you attempt to download the assay to a different instrument, a warning
message will be displayed.

182

Explorer Operator Manual

To link an assay to a specific instrument:
1. Open the View menu and select Properties.
The Assay Properties dialog is displayed.

2. Select the serial number tab.

3. Enter the Explorer Serial Number.
The serial number must be from the instrument that you used to create theassay.
If assays created on one instrument are downloaded to a second instrument you must
update the library on the second instrument as outlined in Updating Library
Information on page 110. You must also calibrate the second instrument.

183

Method Development

Reference Library
There are two options on this tab. Enter the default window percent to be used when
compounds are added to the library. This is the retention time window that SiteChart
will use in an attempt to match the peak with existing reference library compounds.
For example, if the window is set at 50%, and you try to add a peak with a retention
time of 100 seconds, SiteChart will list compounds with retention times from 50
seconds to 150 seconds as possible matches. Only compounds that have not alreadybeen identified will be listed. Compounds within the retention time window will belisted in the Add dialog box that opens when you double-click on an unknown peak.
See Adding Compounds to the Library on page 162.
The second option on this tab allows you to copy the current library to the reference
library. You can use this feature to create your own assays.
To create your own reference library:
1. Create a library by storing compounds as outlined in Adding Compounds to the
Library on page 162.
You can also use the existing library and update the compound information as
described in Updating Library Information on page 110.
2. Perform a few runs and ensure your library information is correct.
3. Open the View menu and select Properties.
4. Select the Reference Library tab.

184

Explorer Operator Manual

5. Click Copy Lib to Ref Lib.
6. Save the assay with a new name.
NOTE: Do not overwrite the reference library supplied with your assay.
Assay Wizard
The window percent in this tab determines the co-elution window. If you set thewindow percent to 10%, compounds with retention times within 10% of each otherwill be identified as a co-elution and Assay Wizard will warn you.
Before setting this parameter, you may want to perform a few runs to ensure you canobtain good separation and good integration. Peaks that cannot be reliably separated,
identified and quantified must be identified as a co-elution.

185

Method Development

Method Development Using Explorer Directly
Developing your own method allows you to optimize the system for your particularapplication. If for example you want to run benzene, toluene and m-xylene (BTX) as
quickly as possible, you can increase the pressure, increase the temperature anddecrease the analysis time.
Normally you will access most of the options covered in this section using the
SiteChart software as described in Method Development Using SiteChart, startingon page 160. A brief description of each function and how to change the settings isprovided to allow you to make changes to the method when SiteChart is notavailable.
NOTE: Changes made to the method using Explorer directly cannot be saved to disk. Thechanges will be lost when a new method is loaded.
One or more methods will be provided with your assay. Use SiteChart to load therequired method.
You must put Explorer into supervisor mode in order to access all theoptions covered in this section. In supervisor mode, all the user mode
commands are available and advanced method development features are also
accessible.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, MODE. Use the arrow keys to select Super.
2. Press Enter Menu and Exit.
A password is required to change from user mode to supervisor mode. The
password is factory set and cannot be changed. The password is 12344321.
3. Press Enter Menu.
You are now in supervisor mode.

186

Explorer Operator Manual

Selecting Columns and Detectors
Information specific to your assay is provided in the user notes supplied with yourassay. Information such as column coating or packing material and column length
will help you to determine which column to use for your application. A list of assay
compounds and their associated chromatographic settings is also provided, in theuser notes, to aid in the selection of a column for a specific application.
A detector is also selected as part of the method. If you compounds are better suited
to ECD detection, then select a method that utilizes the ECD. If you have co-elutions
on the PID, you can run a sample using the ECD and the PID. If both detectors are
selected the column effluent is split. Part of the sample is sent through the ECD andthe rest is sent through the PID. Using this method you can obtain two
chromatograms from the sample.
If the compounds of interest must be run on two columns, you must perform two
runs to complete an analysis and two runs to calibrate the instrument. If thecompounds of interest must be separated on all three columns, you must perform
three runs to complete an analysis and three runs to calibrate the instrument.
Enable only the columns that you require for your application. You must select thecolumn in combination with a detector. Select the PID or the ECD. The ECD is only
available for Assay 1.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, and COLUMN. Use the arrow keys toselect the column/detector combination and press Enter Menu to confirm theselection.
The ECD options are located below the PID options. Press the DWN ARROW
to select the ECD options.
You can select both PID and ECD column combinations. If you have selected
PID Column B and ECD Column B a run on Column B will be put throughboth detectors. You can view the output from one detector at a time.
2. Select one, two or all three columns and associated detectors.
3. Press Exit to close the box.
4. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
187

Method Development

5. If you have selected the ECD, you must set it up.
6. To change the view from the PID to the ECD, press DISPLAY, STATUS, GC,
DET. You will be prompted to change views to the ECD.
7. Press Enter Menu.
Use this option to switch back to the PID view.
If you are using one of the methods supplied with your assay, each column will haveassociated chromatographic settings. You can modify these settings to suit yourapplication or you can use the existing settings.
Assay development can be approached in two ways: first, you can develop a custom
assay based on the compounds that are included as part of the assay that has been
shipped with your instrument. Second, you can develop your own library ofcompounds.
You can set the PID to high sensitivity for low concentrations, or for compounds
that do not respond well to a PID. Select low sensitivity for high concentrations. The
ECD has one sensitivity setting.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, SENSE.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the high sensitivity option for your columns.
If the high sensitivity option is not selected, then the detector is operating at
low sensitivity.

188

Explorer Operator Manual

Adding Compounds to the Library
If you need to add compounds to your library, you need to run an analysis of thecompounds and then add each compound to the library. Although you can add
compounds to Explorer directly using the following procedure, we recommend
using SiteChart to create and modify library information. If you have prepared alibrary on the instrument there is no way to save it. It will be lost when anothermethod is loaded. If the library is created in SiteChart you can save it as part of acustom method for later use. It can then be downloaded to Explorer at any time.
1. Refer to the user notes supplied with your assay to determine which columns
will provide the best separation for your compounds. You may require two or
possibly all three columns. If your method requires two or more columns you
must repeat this procedure for each column.
2. Select one column/detector combination and disable the other two columns.
3. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY.
The library for the selected column will be displayed.
4. Delete any compounds that are not required for your assay.
5. Press LIST, EDIT, STORE, EDIT. You will be prompted for a Peak No. Enter0 to delete the peak from the library.
6. Press DISPLAY, GC, GRAPH.
This will display the chromatogram so you can see the compound peaks. You
can also use the peak report display.
7. Connect a sample to the sample in port and begin a run.
If you are performing a syringe injection, prepare the syringe sample and inject
it at the beep. You may have to do a few runs in order to optimize your method.
Once you have obtained well separated peaks at the desired analysis time then
you can store the compounds in the library.
8. When the analysis is complete, press LIBRARY, LIST, EDIT, STORE.

189

Method Development

9. Use the arrow keys to enter the peak number of the peak you want to store.
Press Enter Menu.
10. Use the arrow keys to enter the compound name. Press Enter Menu.
This will be the first concentration stored for this compound. This box willallow you to store the compound at multiple concentrations.
11. Press Enter Menu to confirm. Press Exit to close the box.
12. Use the arrow keys to enter the concentration of the compound. Press Enter
Menu to confirm.
13. Use the arrow keys to enter the size of the window.
The Window size is the deviation in retention time for which Explorer willcompensate. For example, if the window is set at 10%, a compound with aretention time of 100 s will still be identified if it elutes at anytime between 90
and 110 seconds.
14. Select the desired curve fit option.
Line segments will join the calibration points you enter and use this as thecalibration curve. Linear will use linear regression to find the best line throughthe calibration points you store. Quadratic will determine the best quadratic
function to fit your stored concentration points. Cubic will use a third orderfunction to fit your data.
15. Press Enter Menu and then press Exit to close the box.
16. Press ALARM and use the arrow keys to enter an alarm concentration.
If the detected concentration exceeds this alarm level, an alarm will be
generated.
17. Press CALCMPD.
A check will appear beside the compound name to indicate the compound isselected for calibration.
18. Review the information in the calibration box to ensure all the information has
been entered correctly.

190

Explorer Operator Manual

19. Repeat this procedure for the other compounds to be stored in this library.
20. If possible run the compounds at more than one concentration. Use STORE to
store up to five concentration values for a compound.
Best response results will be obtained this way.
21. Once all the peak information has been entered, press Enter Menu, DISPLAY,
GC, GRAPH, REINT to re-integrate the chromatogram.
Explorer will use the new library information to identify the peaks.
22. If your compounds of interest require another column option, select the next
column and run another analysis. Store the compounds as outlined above.
23. Repeat this procedure for a third column if necessary.

191

Method Development

Analysis Settings
NOTE: Changes made to the method, using Explorer directly cannot be saved to disk. Thechanges will be lost when a new method is loaded.

Analysis Time
Analysis time is the duration of the analysis. You must set the analysis time so that
all compounds of interest clear the column and pass into the detector. Details of how
to set the analysis time are provided in the user notes specific to your assay.
To change the analysis time:
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the analysis time. Disable theother columns.
3. Press Exit to close the box and then Enter Menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, TIMING, and ANLZ.
5. Use the arrow keys to enter the new analysis time.
6. Press Enter Menu.
7. If you need to change the analysis time for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
8. When you have changed the analysis time for each column, enable all thecolumns required for your method.

192

Explorer Operator Manual

Backflush TimeThe analysis time consists of the foreflush time and the backflush time. During
foreflush the sample is injected onto the column and is allowed to clear theprecolumn. When the compounds of interest have cleared the precolumn, backflush
begins. Set the backflush time so that all your compounds of interest clear theprecolumn. Perform a few runs to ensure your compounds of interest are notbackflushed. Details of how to determine the backflush time are provided in the user
notes specific to your assay.
To change the backflush time:
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the backflush time. Disable theother columns.
3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, TIMING, and BCKFLSH.
5. Use the arrow keys to enter the new backflush time. Press Enter Menu.
6. If you need to change the backflush time for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
7. When you have changed the backflush time for each column, enable all thecolumns required for your method.

Pump Time
The pump time is the duration the pump draws sample through the sample in port toflush and fill the sample loop. You must increase the pump time if you are using along probe or an extended probe. Set the pump time to between 20 and 45 seconds.
The pump time for the probe is set automatically when you select the probe to be
used:
1. Press Enter Menu and then press SETUP, MODE, INJECT.

193

Method Development

2. Press PROBE. Use the up and down arrow keys to select the desired probe.
The short probe is a 6” (15 cm) Teflon probe. The long probe is the three meter
sample line. The telescoping sample probe is 2 m long and has an extension
handle.
3. Press Enter Menu to confirm your selection and then press Exit to close thebox and return to the menu.
4.

Press Enter Menu to close the menu.

If you need finer control of the pump time you can adjust the time to suit yourmethod. Another consideration when setting the pump time is the PID sensitivity.
When Explorer changes the PID sensitivity (gain), it must monitor and change theoffset. This occurs during the pump time. Explorer begins to adjust the offset at
about 8-10 seconds into the pump time. Typical setting for the pump time do notallow sufficient time for baseline stabilization after the extreme changes that
occur during gain switching.
If it is necessary to switch gains between runs, set the pump times to at least 20. Usetypical times of 10 to 15 seconds when no gain switching is required.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the pump time. Disable the othercolumns.
3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, TIMING, and PUMP.
5. Use the arrow keys to enter the new pump time. Press Enter Menu.
6. If you need to change the pump time for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
7. When you have changed the pump time for each column, enable all thecolumns required for your method.

194

Explorer Operator Manual

If minimizing the pump time is critical for your application, you must confirm
correct offset adjustment.
1. Set the pump time to 10 seconds.
This is the minimum value for the pump time.
2. Perform 3-4 analyses on each active column. For each analysis, monitor thesignal level at the end of the pump time.
The baseline should be approximately 2 mV if the PID sensitivity is set to highand approximately 200 mV if the PID sensitivity is set to low.
3. If the baseline has not been set correctly, then the pump time is too short.
Increase the pump time and repeat this procedure.
NOTE: If your method incorporates a switch in gain between analyses, then the pump timemust be set to 20 seconds.

Injection Time
Injection time determines how long the sample loop is in line with the column and in
turn, the volume of the sample that is injected onto the column. Injection time has noeffect on syringe injection. Setting the injection time to 10 seconds will inject theentire contents of the sample loop onto the column. The volume of the sample loop
is 0.5 mL.
Explorer is a very sensitive instrument. It is easy to overload the column anddetector by injecting a sample that is too large. Normally, you will set the injection
time to between 0.4 and 2 second. You may want to start with a short injection
time, perform a run and increase it to obtain the best results.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the injection time. Disable theother columns.
3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, TIMING, and INJECT.
195

Method Development

5. Use the arrow keys to enter the new injection time. Press Enter Menu.
6. If you need to change the injection time for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
7. When you have changed the injection time for each column, enable all thecolumns required for your method.

196

Explorer Operator Manual

Column Temperature
In isothermal operation the columns are maintained at a fixed temperature. Retention
time drift is virtually eliminated and faster analysis results are obtained with lessfrequent calibration. The PID is maintained at the same temperature as the columns.
NOTE: Do not set the temperature to below 40 C, as samples may condense on the column
and contaminate your system.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the column temperature. Disable
the other columns.
3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, TEMP, and COLUMN.
5. Use the arrow keys to enter the new column temperature. Press Enter Menu.
Explorer will allow you to set the temperature to between 0 and 80 °C. It is notadvisable to set the column temperature to less than 40 °C.
6. If you need to change the column temperature for the other two columns,
repeat this procedure for each column.
7. When you have changed the column temperature for each column, enable all
the columns required for your method.
If you have entered different temperatures for each column, Explorer will require 20
to 30 minutes between analyses to reach the column temperature.

197

Method Development

ECD Temperature
Explorer equipped with an ECD is not classified for use inhazardous locations.
WARNINGThe ECD temperature can be set independently of the column and the PID. The
ECD must be maintained at a temperature greater than or equal to the column
temperature.
NOTE: Do not set the ECD temperature less than the column temperature. It is possible thesample could condense and contaminate the radioactive foil contained in the ECD.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the column temperature. Disable
the other columns.
3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, TEMP, and ECD.
5. Use the arrow keys to enter the new column temperature. Press Enter Menu.
Explorer will allow you to set the temperature to between 0 and 80 °C. It is notadvisable to set the ECD temperature to less than 40 °C.
6. If you need to change the column temperature for the other two columns,
repeat this procedure for each column.
7. When you have changed the column temperature for each column, enable all
the columns required for your method.
If you have entered different temperatures for each column, Explorer will require 20
to 30 minutes between analyses to reach the ECD temperature.

198

Explorer Operator Manual

Pressure
When adjusting the carrier gas pressure, ensure the flow through the detector ismaintained at a constant rate. Variations in the detector flow will result in baseline
instability, especially with high sensitivity applications. After you change thepressure, allow a few minutes for the flow through the columns to stabilize. You can
set the pressure to any value between 0 and 14 psig.
Adjusting the pressure will effect all flow rates. For example if you increase thepressure, the maintenance flow through the idle columns and the make-up flow
through the ECD (if it is installed) will also increase.
A higher pressure will result in increased flow rates but decreased operating timefrom the internal cylinder. You may have to refill the internal cylinder more
frequently.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN. Select the column forwhich you want to alter the pressure. Disable the other columns.
2. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
3. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD and PRESS.
4. Use the arrow keys to enter the new column head pressure. Press Enter Menu.
5. If you need to change the pressure for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
6. When you have changed the column pressure for each column, enable all thecolumns required for your method.
If you have entered different pressures for each column, Explorer will requireapproximately 5 minutes between analyses to adjust the flow rates and stabilize.

199

Method Development

Integration Method
Normally, you do not need to alter the integration parameters. Setting theseparameters can require some expertise. You will need to perform a few runs toensure accurate integration. You may be able to obtain better integration bysmoothing the signal:
1. Press Enter Menu, DISPLAY, GC, GRAPH AND SMOOTH.
The signal will be smoothed.
2. Press SMOOTH again to further smooth the signal.
3. Press REINT, to re-integrate the chromatogram.
If you cannot obtain accurate integration using the preset integration parameters,then you will have to modify the existing parameters.
The integrator extracts information from the detector signal. The integrator has been
designed to reduce or eliminate the user input required for good chromatographic
integration.
Chromatographic peaks are identified according to the following recognition
sequence based on the slope of the signal coming from the detector. The integrator
looks for each step to occur in sequence.
1. When the slope exceeds a threshold value for a certain time period, the peakhas started.
2. The slope goes negative for a time period.
This indicates the peak maximum has been detected.
3. At this point the height of the peak can be calculated.
If it is greater than the Minimum height value in the Integration Method thenthe sequence is continued, otherwise the peak is disregarded and the integrator
goes back to step 1.
4. The slope, now negative, rises above a threshold value for a certain time
period. The end of the peak has been detected.
200

Explorer Operator Manual

Peak retention times are measured when the slope changes from positive to negative(the peak maxima).
Peak areas are calculated by summing the area slices beneath the signal andsubtracting the area below the line connecting the start and end points.

Up Slope, Down Slope and Filter
The slope of the signal is calculated from a five point moving average and iscompared with the effective up and down slope sensitivities to start and stop theintegrator.
Since baseline noise is constant throughout the chromatogram, the reduced slope
sensitivities may allow false noise peaks to be detected. To reduce these effects theintegrator filters the signal by averaging the signal over larger periods while
reducing the slope sensitivities. This allows the signal to noise ratio to remain
constant throughout an analysis giving good integration on both early and late peaks.
Filter 1 provides the most filtering with the signal being averaged over the longest
period before the slope is calculated. Filter 4 provides the most versatility; the signal
is analyzed simultaneously by four different filters as with auto-integration. Whenthe signal noise is low, select Filter 4. For noisier signals, select lower Filter
numbers.
To change the settings:
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the integration settings. Disable
the other columns.
3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, METH, and SLOPES.

201

Method Development

5. Select the parameter you want to change. Press SLP UP.
The up slope factor determines what the integration start point will be. If up
slope is set to 6 mV/S, then the integrator will look for the signal level to rise at
a rate of at least 6 mV/S for five consecutive samples. Up slope can be any
value from 1 to 99 mV/S. Typically values between 1 and 16 mV/S are used.
6. Use the arrow keys to enter the new value and press Enter Menu. Press SLP
DWN and enter a new value, if required.
Typically values between 1 and 16 mV/S are used.
7. To change the filter setting, press FILTER.
8. Use the arrow keys to select the desired filter setting and press Enter Menu.
9. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
10. Press Enter Menu, DISPLAY, GC, GRAPH and REINT.
The signal will be re-integrated using the new integration settings.
11. Press DISPLAY, GC, PEAK to see if the peaks have been integrated moreaccurately.
12. If you need to change the settings for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
13. When you have changed the settings for each column, enable all the columns
required for your method.

Minimum Height
The minimum height is the minimum peak height that will be accepted as a sample
peak. This factor allows the integrator to eliminate peaks due to noise.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the analysis time. Disable theother columns.
202

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, METH, and HEIGHT.
5. Use the arrow keys to enter the new value and press Enter Menu.
6. Press Enter Menu, DISPLAY, GC, GRAPH, REINT.
The signal will be re-integrated using the new integration settings.
7. Press DISPLAY, GC, PEAK to see if the unwanted peaks have been removed.
8. If you need to change the settings for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
9. When you have changed the settings for each column, enable all the columns
required for your method.

Automatic Integration
The choice of initial up/down slope and filter can require some expertise.
Explorer automates this procedure as the up/down slope, Minimum height, andFilter options are set automatically if automatic integration is enabled.
These parameters are calculated on the basis of signal noise sampling during the first
five seconds of an analysis. During the first five seconds of an analysis, the signal issampled by the integrator at a frequency of approximately 20 Hz. The integrator
uses linear regression to determine the best line through these sample points. The
sample scatter is then used to determine the minimum height. The slope of eachgroup of five sample points is then calculated. The scatter of the slopes is used todetermine the up and down slope sensitivities.
If you have made changes to the integration settings and cannot obtain the desired
integration, then try using the automatic integration features.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the integration settings. Disable
the other columns.

203

Method Development

3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, METH, and AUTO.
5. Use the arrow keys to select on and press Enter Menu. Press Exit to close thebox.
6. Press Enter Menu, DISPLAY, GC, GRAPH and REINT.
The signal will be re-integrated using the new integration settings.
7. Press DISPLAY, GC, PEAK to see if the peaks have been integrated
accurately.
8. If you need to change the settings for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
9. When you have changed the settings for each column, enable all the columns
required for your method.

Integrator Delay
The integrator delay is used to delay the start of integration after the analysis begins.
It is used to prevent integration of peaks which may appear as a result of pressurechanges during sample injection, especially when large syringe injections are made.
If you have more than 25 peaks in an analysis, integrator delay may be used todetermine which 25 peaks will be identified. If you are interested in the peaks in the
middle or at the end of the chromatogram, set the integrator delay so that the firstpeaks are not integrated.
1. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, COLUMN.
2. Select the column for which you want to alter the integration settings. Disable
the other columns.
3. Press Exit to close the box. Press Enter Menu to close the menu.
4. Press Enter Menu, SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, METH, and DELAY.

204

Explorer Operator Manual

5. Use the arrow keys to enter a delay time and press Enter Menu.
6. Press Enter Menu, DISPLAY, GC, GRAPH and REINT.
7. If you need to change the settings for the other two columns, repeat thisprocedure for each column.
8. When you have changed the settings for each column, enable all the columns
required for your method.

205

Method Development

TVOC Methods
The TVOC method will provide accurate response in the approximate range 10 to
150 ppm when you use nitrogen carrier and are calibrating using 100 ppm
isobutylene.

Carrier Gas and Injection TimeThe easiest way to adjust TVOC sensitivity is to change the injection time. However
this will also effect the range. The useful dynamic range is limited with nitrogen by
the presence of a negative dip in the baseline caused by air in the sample. This
negative peak is approximately 60 mV in height and it co-elutes with the VOC peak.
Any peak which is to be accurately integrated must be greater than 100 mV inheight. You can determine the peak height from the graph view. Explorer cannot
quantitate a peak greater than 2500 mV in height.
The PID response is non-linear and this is seen as a disproportionate amount ofsignal at higher concentrations. When these factors are taken into account the useful
dynamic range is about 15:1. The exact useful range will depend on the compound
being analyzed. If the injection time is adjusted to give a 100 mV peak for 1 ppm
benzene the working concentration range will be approximately 1 to 15 ppm. If theinjection time is adjusted to give a 100 mV peak for 10 ppm benzene the working
concentration range will be approximately 10 to 150ppm.
Explorer’s sensitivity with nitrogen carrier gas is approximately 400 mV/ppm ofbenzene so the lower detection limit could be sub-ppm benzene if, for instancethe injection time is set to 6 seconds.
The negative baseline dip also makes the TVOC less linear than the GC because the
TVOC peak must first fill the air dip before a positive peak is obtained. This
amounts to a sample loss which has the greatest effect on quantitation accuracy at
low concentrations.
The ranges listed in the table below are approximate and are based on isobutylene
samples.

206

Explorer Operator Manual

Injection Time (s)Approximate
Range (ppm)

0.5

10 to 150

3

1 to 15

6

0.5 to 7.5

With air carrier gas, the TVOC can be used to make accurate measurements below
0.1 ppm since there is no negative baseline dip. The detector response will also be
more linear over the concentration range. The sensitivity (peak height/ppm) is
reduced to approximately 1/3 of that obtained with nitrogen carrier gas, but theabsence of the negative baseline dip offsets the loss in sensitivity.
The ranges listed in the table below are approximate and are based on isobutylene
samples.
Injection Time (s)Approximate
Range (ppm)

0.5

3 to 300

3

0.3 to 50

60.1 to 25

Effects of Other Parameters
Backflush does not have any effect in TVOC mode when loop injection is selected.
When you are performing syringe injections, backflushing can reduce peak tailing
caused by the injection port. Backflushing of the injection port begins at the
specified backflush time.

207

Method Development

The TVOC pressure setting will be the same as the last GC column method. Whenyou switch between TVOC and GC modes there is no wait time while the pressurestabilizes at a new value.
You can operate the TVOC mode at 14 psi. This will increase sensitivity and reduce
the TVOC analysis time allowing faster TVOC cycling. When you switch back to
the GC method, the pressure will change to that specified by the GC method.
You may have to wait a few minutes while Explorer adjusts the pressure andstabilizes the flow rates.
The default analysis time is 40 seconds. This is suitable for pressure settings
between 8 and 14 psi. At 14 psi the TVOC peak elutes quickly and the analysis time
could be reduced if faster cycling is required.

208

Calibration

6

Calibration

Introduction
Gas chromatography is a comparative method; therefore, an unknown sample must
be compared to a known standard in order for the sample components to be
identified and quantified.
If Explorer will be used to analyze air samples then a pressurized supply ofcommercially prepared and analyzed calibration gas must be obtained for use
with Explorer. This calibration gas can be used to fill gas bags or it can beconnected directly to the Sample In port.
Explorer may also be used to analyze water samples. It is not designed to accept
liquid injections, so water samples are analyzed using the headspace above
samples. You should obtain commercially prepared standards. Contact INFICON
Technical Support for more information on preparing aqueous standards.

Do not inject liquid samples into Explorer. You will damage
the instrument
CAUTION
You must calibrate using the same technique as your sample. If you are using
automatic loop injection for sampling, calibrate using loop injection. If you are using
syringe injection for sampling, calibrate using syringe injection.
Explorer should be calibrated at the start of each day of operation, and after
each eight hours of operation. If the Method is changed, then calibration isrequired. Calibration is also required after most maintenance is performed.
Explorer should be operated within the temperature range of 5 °C to 40 °C (40to 105 °F). If the instrument is exposed to a large temperature change, such asthat encountered when going outside from an air conditioned lab in the summer,then allow Explorer to warm up for 20 to 30 minutes after being turned on.

210

Explorer Operator Manual

When ambient conditions fall outside recommended specifications, Explorer
should be in a controlled environment, i.e. in a vehicle with the heating or air
conditioning running or indoors. Bring the sample to Explorer in gas bags, glass
vessels or syringes.
Refer to the user notes supplied with your assay for a complete list of compounds
that can be separated and identified. Compounds can be separated on one or more of
the three columns. The information in the user notes will help you determine whichcolumns you must use to obtain the best separation and provide specific details on
calibration for your application.
The following procedures for calibration describe the calibration using the
instrument alone. To facilitate calibration use SiteChart. If you cannot carry a PC
into the field, perform a calibration before beginning field work and check thecalibration once you reach your site.
The assay that is supplied with your instrument will allow you to perform a set ofanalyses that will separate and identify some or of all the library compounds. If you
do not need to detect all the compounds contained in the library, you can edit thelibrary. Refer to the user notes supplied with your assay for complete details.
NOTE: You must make changes to the assay in the SiteChart software. If you create yourcustom assay on the instrument you cannot send it to the PC to be saved.

211

Calibration

Library
After each analysis, Explorer compares detected peaks against those in the library.
It identifies those that match library compounds and then quantifies the identified
peaks using the sensitivity from the library. Peaks are identified by comparing theretention time of the detected peak to the retention times stored in the library, or it
identifies the peak as the largest peak within a retention time window.
Explorer calculates a sensitivity value for each compound when it is stored in thelibrary. The sensitivity is the ratio of the measured response (peak area) to the actual
concentration of the compound. Each time a calibration is performed the retention
time and sensitivity values of each compound are updated in the library.
Each assay includes a library of compounds. The compounds and all associatedcalibration information have been provided as part of the assay. You may run theassay as it has been programmed for you, or you may customize the assay for yourparticular application.
If you have more than one assay or if you have created your own assay, a calibrationmust be performed to update the library information each time a different assay
library is loaded for use.
If Explorer will be set up for loop injection, compounds must be stored by loop
injection and then calibrations must be performed using loop injection
techniques. Samples that are injected manually by syringe must be stored bysyringe and then calibration must be performed by syringe injection. If both loop
and syringe injection techniques are used, create a library for each.
NOTE: Do not use a library created by loop injection interchangeably with one created bysyringe injection.

212

Explorer Operator Manual

Selecting and Calibrating Compounds
Each compound you select will have pre-programmed analysis information stored in
the library. If you have selected compounds that are all run on the same column then
you need to run one analysis to calibrate your instrument.
If you selected compounds that must be separated on two columns, then you willneed to perform two runs in order to calibrate your instrument. During calibration,
you will select one column at time. Once the first column has been calibrated you
will select and calibrate the second column. When calibration is complete you canenable both columns. When you are performing a sample analysis, you will need toperform two runs, one on each column, in order to complete your analysis.
If your selected compounds require all three columns for separation, you will needto complete three runs to calibrate the instrument. As with two columns, eachcolumn will be calibrated separately. When calibration is complete you can enable
all three columns. When you are performing a sample analysis, you will need toperform three runs, one on each column, in order to complete your analysis.
During calibration, Explorer will look for all compounds listed in the library. You
must obtain calibration gas containing all the compounds listed in the library. If
you are using more than one column/detector pair, you must obtain calibration gas
for each one.
NOTE: To obtain the most accurate identification and quantitation of the compounds,
ensure all compounds listed in the library are contained in the calibration gas.

213

Calibration

Calibration Gas
Calibration gas containing all of the compounds of interest. The compounds
and the concentration of the calibration gas will depend on your application.
When ordering calibration gas, specify each compound and concentration.
Specify a 5% blend tolerance, and a 2% analytical tolerance.
Standards must be made up in hydrocarbon free air. Balance air should nothave more than 0.1 ppm total hydrocarbons (THC). If your standards are
unstable in air or if you are using nitrogen as carrier gas you may obtain yourcalibration standards made up in nitrogen. Balance nitrogen should not havemore than 0.1 ppm total hydrocarbons (THC).
When selecting calibration gas, keep in mind the upper and lower limits of theassay. Order each compound at a concentration that is close to the value ofinterest.
NOTE: Since your samples will all be in air, it is not necessary to obtain standards innitrogen if you are using nitrogen carrier gas.
Calibration gas regulator, with 1/4” compression fitting outlet. Use only the
specified regulator for calibration gas. The regulator must be able to deliver up
to 14 psig and 300 ml/min. Confirm regulator type and material with yourspecialty gas supplier.
Obtain a regulator with the appropriate inlet fitting for your calibration tank.
Contact your specialty gas supplier for details.
Check with your specialty gas supplier for any special accessories required foryour regulator. Tighten the regulator onto the tank with a wrench. Do not overtighten.
NOTE: Do not force the connection. Do not use Teflon tape with CGA fittings. In general,these fittings are designed for metal to metal sealing.
NOTE: Do not use adapters to connect one CGA fitting to another type of CGA fitting. If theregulator does not match the outlet on your calibration tank, contact your specialty
gas supplier.

214

Explorer Operator ManualGas bags can be filled and used to calibrate the instrument. The gas bag andgas bag adapter are included in the Calibration Kits (MX380310 or
MX380337). Complete details of calibrations are covered in Calibration
starting on page 210.

Syringe Injection
For syringe injection of headspace samples, the following items are required:
Gas syringe
Septum capped vials.
Septa
These items are included in the Assay 1 Calibration Kit (MX380310).

215

Calibration

Connecting Calibration Gas
Observe proper handling procedure for all compressed gases.

WARNING
1. Connect a regulator to the tank of calibration gas.
If more than one tank of calibration gas is required, connect a regulator to eachtank.
NOTE: Do not use regulators interchangeably as this will lead to contamination anderroneous calibration results. Refer to the user notes supplied with your assay todetermine what type of calibration gas you require.
2. Using a calibration flow adapter (MX380328), connect the regulator to the inletof the flow adapter.
You cannot connect a supply of pressurized calibration gas directly to thesample in port. The excess gas must be vented to atmosphere.
The adapter is supplied with a 1/4”parallel compression fitting. If this does not
fit your regulator you can remove the parallel to NPT adapter and use the 1/8”
NPT port. You must put new Teflon tape on the male NPT thread in order toobtain a leak tight seal.
You may need to use an additional length of stainless steel tubing between theregulator and the flow adapter to ensure the flow meter is perpendicular to thefloor. If the flow meter is not upright, you may get erroneous flow rates.
3. Connect the tubing from the flow adapter to the adapter union (1/4” to 1/8”), as
shown in Figure 9.

216

Explorer Operator Manual

Figure 9 Connecting the Calibration Flow Adapter
4. A length of 1/4 “Teflon tubing with the 1/4” fittings is supplied with the flow
adapter, connect one end of the tube to the 1/8” to 1/4” adapter union andconnect the other end to the sample in port on Explorer.
NOTE: If you will be using the extended probe or the long probe for sampling, ensure it isconnected to the sample in port during calibration. Connect the probe directly to the
1/8” to 1/4” adapter union instead of using the adapter tubing. You must also selectthe probe option on Explorer to allow for a longer pump time, by pressing Enter
Menu, then SETUP, MODE, INJECT, and PROBE and select the desired probefrom the box using the arrow keys. The pump time will be adjusted automatically.
5. Open the tank of calibration gas, opening the regulator valve slowly.
The float on the flow adapter must be floating. The float should not be in the
red zone and it must not be seated at the bottom of the tube. When the pumpcomes on the float must still be floating, this will ensure calibration gas is
being properly delivered.
6. If you are not using the flow adapter, set the regulator to deliver 300 mL/min.
Use a stainless steel tee to vent the excess calibration gas.
NOTE: If any compounds contained in the calibration gas exceed the TLV concentrations,perform the analyses in a well ventilated area or use a gas bag.
NOTE: Allow the calibration gas to flush all the tubing before beginning an analysis. Afterthe injection has been made, close the tank of calibration gas and then close theregulator.
217

Calibration

Preparing a Gas Bag Sample
Observe proper handling techniques for all gases.

WARNINGNOTE: Connect the regulator to the calibration gas cylinder. You must obtain calibration
gas and a high purity regulator. Obtain a regulator matching the fitting on yourtank of calibration gas. The regulator must have a 1/4” compression fitting at theoutlet in order to use the calibration kit.
1. Tighten the regulator onto the tank with a wrench.
Do not over-tighten.
2. Attach the knurled nut on the gas bag adapter to the regulator, as shown in
Figure 10.
Finger-tighten the fitting.

To Regulator
Outlet or Explorer
Sample In Port

1/4" Teflon Tubing

1/4" to 3/16"
Union
Gas Bag
Tube Stub

Figure 10 Gas Bag Adapter
3. Loosen the knurled nut on the reducing union of the gas bag adapter.

218

Explorer Operator Manual

NOTE: Do not remove the nut from the union as the Teflon ferrules contained inside the nut
may be lost. See Figure 10.
4. Insert the tube stub from the gas bag into the knurled nut and tighten theknurled nut and ensure the tube stub is secure.
If the gas bag is not secure, ensure you have inserted the tube stub far enoughinto the knurled nut.
Do not over tighten the fitting.
NOTE: Over-tightening the Teflon ferrules will result in damage to the ferrules!
5. The union should be connected to the gas bag adapter, if it is not, then tighten
the nut on the adapter tube to the union.
6. Open the gas bag valve by turning the knurled plastic knob counterclockwise toloosen it, then use the knurled collar on the valve tube to gently push the valve
tube toward the bag.
NOTE: Do not use the same gas bag or gas bag adapter for other compounds or calibration
mixes. You will contaminate the bag, the adapter and possibly the instrument.
7. Turn the regulator knob counterclockwise about half a turn to start the flow ofgas and fill the gas bag about half full and then close the regulator.
8. Disconnect the gas bag from the gas bag adapter and empty the bag.
9. Flush the bag a few times with the calibration gas and then fill it.
10. Close the gas bag valve, gently pull the valve tube up, then turn the knurledplastic knob clockwise to tighten it against the valve tube.
11. Remove the knurled nut on the adapter tube from the regulator.

219

Calibration

Using the Gas Bag
Figure 11 shows details of using the gas bag.
Tube Stub

Septum Retainer

Locking Ring
Gas Bag Valve

Injection Port

Replacing the Septum
Remove retainer andreplace silicone septum.
Place septum with
Teflon side down.

Replace septum after
5-10 injections.To replace
septum, turn retainer counterclockwise. For replacement
septa order Teflon bonded to
Silcone, diameter = .375" (9.5 mm)

Figure 11 Using the Gas Bag

220

Replace retainer
Do not overtighten.
Overtightening may resultin needle blocakge

Explorer Operator Manual

Calibration Procedure
Single Detector
1. Select a column.
2. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, CONFIG, and COLUMN.
3. Use the arrow keys to move through the list and press Enter Menu to selectPID Column A, B or C or ECD Column A, B or C.
Ensure only one column/detector combination is selected.
There are two libraries for each column. The PID library or the ECD library is
automatically selected when you choose a column/detector combination.
4. Press Exit to close the box.
5. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY, and LIST.
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the library that matches your selectedcolumn.
The status line at the top of the screen will tell you which library you are using.
Compounds with a check mark are currently selected for calibration.
7. Use the up/down arrows to move through the list of compounds, and then to
enable or disable a compound, move to the compound name and press EDIT
and CALCMPD.
This will toggle the compound on and off. If the compound is not selected
remove it from the library. If the compound is not selected, its response andretention time will be updated ratio-metrically.

221

Calibration

8. Press EDIT and CALCONC to enter the concentration for the compound.
Use the arrow keys to enter the concentration of the compound in yourcalibration gas. If the concentration displayed in the Cal column is correct,
move to the next compound.
Move through the list and check that you have enabled all the compounds andthat you have entered the correct calibration concentration. Remove any
unwanted compounds from the library.
NOTE: Compounds not contained in the calibration gas must be removed from the library,see Removing Library Compounds on page 236.
9. Ensure you are viewing the correct detector output. To change the view, press
DISPLAY, GC, and DET, and when prompted to change views, press EnterMenu.
10. Connect a supply of calibration gas, as outlined , or prepare a syringe sample.
Your calibration gas must contain all the compounds that are enabled in theselected library.
11. Press Start Stop to begin an analysis.
12. Press DISPLAY, GC, and CMPD to view the compound list.
13. When the analysis is complete, review the compound list and ensure all yourcalibration compounds are present.
14. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY, and CAL.
15. When prompted to calibrate using the last analysis, select YES.
If Explorer can match all the compounds in the last analysis with compounds
you have selected for calibration then your library information will be updated
accordingly.
NOTE: If a calibration fault is displayed see Calibration Fault starting on page 266 for
information about correcting the fault

222

Explorer Operator Manual

NOTE: If you need to calibrate a second, or third, column, select the next column anddisable the previous one. Press Enter Menu, then SETUP, CONFIG, and
COLUMN. Use the arrow keys to move through the list and press Enter Menu toselect PID Column A, B or C or ECD Column A, B or C, ensuring only one
column/detector combination is selected. Then calibrate the column as above. If
you are using more than one column, enable the columns once you calibrated eachone of them.

Dual Detectors
1. Select a column by pressing Enter Menu, then SETUP, CONFIG, and
COLUMN.
2. Use the arrow keys to move through the list and press Enter Menu to selectPID Column A, B or C and ECD Column A, B or C.
Ensure only one column and both detectors are selected. If you are calibrating
Column B, select PID Column B and ECD Column B.
3. Press Exit to close the box.
Both the PID library and the ECD library will be selected. Look at the statusline to determine which detector you are viewing on the screen. If you are notviewing the PID library, switch to the PID by pressing DISPLAY, GC, andDET, then when prompted to change views press Enter Menu.
4. To select the PID compounds for your application, press Enter Menu, then
LIBRARY, and LIST, and press the left/right arrow to select the library thatmatches your selected column.
The status line at the top of the screen will tell you which library you are using.
Compounds with a check mark are currently selected for calibration.
5. Use the up/down arrows to move through the list of compounds. To enable ordisable a compound, move to the compound name and press EDIT and
CALCMPD.
This will toggle the compound on and off. If the compound is not selected
remove it from the library.

223

Calibration

6. Press EDIT and CALCONC to enter the concentration for each enabled
compound.
Use the arrow keys to enter the concentration.
If the concentration displayed in the Cal column is correct, move to the nextcompound.
Move through the list and check that you have enabled all the compounds
contained in the calibration gas and have entered the correct calibration
concentration.
NOTE: Compounds not contained in the calibration gas must be removed from the library,see Removing Library Compounds on page 236.
7. To switch to the ECD view, press DISPLAY, GC, and DET, and when
prompted to change views press Enter Menu.
8. To select the ECD compounds for your application, press Enter Menu, then
LIBRARY and LIST, and press the left/right arrow to select the library thatmatches your selected column.
The status line at the top of the screen will tell you which library you are using.
Compounds with a check mark are currently selected for calibration. If thecompound is not selected, remove it from the library.
9. Press EDIT and CALCONC to enter the concentration for the compound.
If the concentration displayed in the Cal column is correct, move to the nextcompound.
Move through the list and check that you have enabled all the compounds ofinterest and have entered the correct calibration concentration and again
remove any unwanted compounds from the library.
10. Connect a supply of calibration gas, as discussed on page 218, or prepare asyringe sample.
NOTE: Your calibration gas must both PID and ECD calibration compounds. If yourcalibration gas contains only the PID compounds, then you must calibrate eachdetector separately.
11. Press Start Stop to begin an analysis.
224

Explorer Operator Manual

12. Press DISPLAY, GC, and CMPD to view the compound list.
Since you are viewing the ECD output, the compound list will show the ECD
compounds.
13. When the analysis is complete, review the compound list and ensure all of yourECD compounds are present.
14. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY and CAL, and when prompted to calibrateusing the last analysis, select YES.
If Explorer can match all the compounds in the last analysis with compounds
you have selected for calibration then your ECD library information will be
updated accordingly.
15. Switch to the PID view by pressing DISPLAY, GC, and DET.
16. Review the compound list and ensure all of your PID compounds are present.
17. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY and CAL, and when prompted to calibrateusing the last analysis, select YES.
If Explorer can match all the compounds in the last analysis with compounds
you have selected for calibration then your PID library information will be
updated accordingly.
NOTE: If a calibration fault is displayed see Calibration Fault starting on page 266 for
information about correcting the fault
NOTE: If you need to calibrate a second, or third, column, select the next column anddisable the previous one. Ensure only one column and both detectors are selected. If
you are calibrating Column B, select PID Column C and ECD Column C. Calibrate
the column as above, and if you are using more than one column, enable thecolumns once you have calibrated each one of them.

225

Calibration

Multiple Point Calibration Curve
NOTE: Changes made to the library using Explorer directly, cannot be saved to disk. Thechanges will be lost when a new method is loaded.
Multiple point calibration may be used to improve the accuracy of
Explorer’s response over a wide concentration range.
Within a library, each compound may be stored at up to 5 different concentration
points. The first point is always (0, 0), and you can store 4 additional concentration
points. You can also select one of four calibration curves; line segment, linear fit,
quadratic fit or cubic fit.
When you perform a calibration, the calibration curve is updated based on the single
concentration point contained in the calibration gas.

Line Segment Calibration Curve
If one concentration point is stored, Explorer draws a line from this (0, 0) to thesingle point and uses the line as the calibration curve. If the compound is stored at
a second, higher concentration, sample concentrations are calculated using the firstsensitivity when the concentration is below the lower concentration. For
concentrations above the lower value, Explorer uses a sensitivity value calculated
from the slope of the line connecting the two concentration response points.

226

Explorer Operator Manual

Figure 12 Line Segment Calibration Curve
If a third, higher concentration is stored, then the concentrations above the second
value are measured using a sensitivity value calculated from the slope of the line
connecting the second and third concentration response points. You can store up to
five concentration points.

Linear Calibration Curve
If you select linear calibration, Explorer will draw the best line through all the
points. It will use a linear least squares fit to determine the slope of the line. Theline will always start at (0, 0). If you have stored only one point you will have a line
segment curve. If you have stored 2 or more points, Explorer will use the leastsquares fit.

227

Calibration

Figure 13 Linear Calibration Curve

Quadratic and Cubic Calibration Curve
A quadratic calibration curve fits a quadratic function to the points you have stored.
In order to use the quadratic calibration curve, you must store at least 2 or morepoints. The curve will always start at (0, 0) and go through all the points you havestored. In order to obtain the most accurate results you should store a point that is at
the top end of the concentration range at which you are looking. If you are interested
in the range 10 to 100 ppm, store a point at 100 ppm. Data past this point will be
extrapolated based on a tangent through the last stored point.
A cubic calibration curve fits a third order function to the points you have stored.
You must store at least three points in order to use a cubic calibration curve. As with
the quadratic curve, you should store a point at the top end of your concentration
range.

228

Explorer Operator Manual

Figure 14 Quadratic Calibration Curve

Storing Multiple Points
As good analytical practice, standards for multiple point calibrations should be run
and stored in the library in order of increasing concentration.
When a calibration is performed, only one point will be used to update thecalibration curve that you have created. All of the points on the curve are updated
based on the response ratio from the single point, contained in the calibration gas.
Ideally, you will choose a point in the middle of the calibration curve as theconcentration to be included in the calibration gas.
For high accuracy applications, you may want to do multiple point calibration on adaily basis.
1. Select the correct column for your compounds.
If your compounds of interest must be run on more than one column, you muststore information for one column at a time.
2. Connect your sample and press Start Stop to begin an analysis.

229

Calibration

3. When the analysis is complete you must store the new point.
If you are storing a number of compounds then you may want to print theanalysis for ease of reference. Use a PC and the SiteChart software to print theanalysis.
4. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY, LIST, EDIT, and STORE, and enter the
peak number to be stored in the box that opens, then press Enter Menu toconfirm the peak number.
Explorer will display the matching compound name from the current library.
5. Press Enter Menu to confirm.
NOTE: If the identified compound is not the compound you are trying to store, then you areusing the wrong library. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY and use the left/rightarrow key to select the correct library.
6. Use the up/down arrow keys to select the point you want to add and press Exit.
7. Use the arrow keys to enter the correct concentration and press Enter Menu.
8. Use the arrow keys to enter the window size.
You may want to decrease the window for higher concentrations.
9. Press Enter Menu to complete the process.
You have now stored the compound at two concentrations.
10. Repeat these steps for all compounds you want to store and for allconcentration points.
11. Connect a supply of calibration gas and press Start Stop to begin an analysis.
12. When the analysis is complete, review the compound list and ensure all yourcompounds are present.

230

Explorer Operator Manual

13. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY and CAL, and when prompted to calibrateusing the last analysis, select YES.
If Explorer can match all the compounds in the last analysis with compounds
you have selected for calibration then your Library information will be updated
accordingly and the instrument will be ready for operation.
NOTE: If a calibration fault is displayed see Calibration Fault starting on page 266 for
information about correcting the fault.

231

Calibration

TVOC Calibration
The TVOC mode must be calibrated in order to display concentration in ppm units
equivalent to the calibration gas. Calibration gas, containing a known concentrationof a photoionizable gas or vapor, is used to set the sensitivity.
A standard of isobutylene at a known concentration is recommended for setting
the TVOC sensitivity. If Explorer is calibrated with isobutylene, it displays
concentrations in units equivalent to ppm of isobutylene. If isobutylene were theonly photoionizable compound in the sample, then Explorer would display its
concentration directly.
Explorer responds more or less readily to other compounds than it does to
isobutylene. Because it has a medium sensitivity to isobutylene, this gas has
been chosen as a reliable means of reporting an average concentration of total
photoionizable volatile organic compounds.
For special applications, gases other than isobutylene can be used to calibrate
Explorer. Contact INFICON for more information.
If you are using the long probe or the extended probe for sampling, thenensure the probe is connected to Explorer and press Enter Menu, then
SETUP, MODE, INJECT and PROBE and select the probe you are using.
Explorer will then adjust its pump time so that the pump will draw an
accurate sample.
NOTE: Ensure the sample probe is free of any contamination as this will affect thecalibration.
1. Press Enter Menu, then DISPLAY, VOC and REPORT to ensure Explorer isin TVOC mode.
2. Press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY and ALARM and enter an alarm level.
3. Press SPAN and enter the span gas concentration.
4. Press Enter Menu to clear the menu.
232

Explorer Operator Manual

5. Connect a supply of calibration gas to the sample in port as outlined inConnecting Calibration Gas on page 218.
Use a clean regulator for the TVOC calibration gas.
6. Ensure the calibration gas cylinder is upright and open the regulator by turning
the valve counterclockwise.
Open the regulator until the float is 1/8" from its rest position.
7. Press Start Stop to begin a run.
8. When the run is complete, press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY and CAL andwhen prompted to calibrate using the last analysis, press YES.
Explorer sets its sensitivity.
When the display reverts to the default display, TVOC mode is calibrated andready for use.
9. Ensure the correct concentration is displayed and then remove the adapter
tubing from the sample in port and from the regulator.

233

Calibration

Removing Library Compounds
Compounds that are not required as part of your application should be removed fromthe library. This may speed analysis time and will reduce the possibility of
misidentification due to co-elution. Refer to the user notes supplied with your assay
for details.
NOTE: You must make modifications to the assay in the SiteChart software. If you create
your custom assay on the instrument you cannot save it.
1. Open a copy of the assay.
Do not modify your original assay.
2. To remove compounds from the library, press Enter Menu, then LIBRARY,
LIST, EDIT, and STORE.
3. When prompted for a Peak No., enter 0 to erase the compound from the library.
4. Make all the changes required and then save it as your custom application.

234

Maintenance andTroubleshooting

7

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance Schedule
Do not perform any maintenance procedures on Explorer inhazardous locations.
WARNING
Explorer requires regular maintenance to keep it operating efficiently. Replacementof some items will vary with usage, the following table shows the suggested
maintenance periods:
Item/Operation

236

Frequency

Replace injection port septum

Every 10 injections

Replace inlet filter

Once a week

Clean UV lamp window

Once a week or as required

Update assay

As required

Wipe Test the ECD (Contact your local
authority for regulations.)

Every 6 months (USA),every year (Canada)

Replace UV lamp

Once a year or as required

Replace calibration gas (commercial cylinder)Once a year or as required

Purge internal carrier gas cylinder

As required

Condition column

As required

Charge battery packAs requiredExplorer Operator Manual

You are not authorized to clean the ECD. Do not put any cleaning
agents through the ECD.
WARNING

237

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Replacing the Sample Inlet Filter
Do not remove or replace the inlet filter in hazardous locations.

WARNING
Explorer is equipped with a combined dust and water filter to reduce detector
contamination. As the filter collects dust, Explorer’s inlet flow rate and sensitivity
decrease. The filter will not allow water to pass through, but the filter will notstop all solvents.

Do not aspirate liquid samples with Explorer.
CAUTION
Replace the filter on a weekly basis, or more frequently if Explorer is used in a
dusty or wet environment. You must replace the filter if Explorer has been exposed
to liquid water. If you are sampling hot gases or vapors, condensation in the sample
line may also affect the filter. The pump will sound labored when the filter requires
replacement.
1. Turn the instrument off.
2. If you are using a three meter sample line or an extension probe, remove theprobe from the sample in port.
3. Unscrew the filter housing from the inlet housing.
Be careful not to lose the o-ring seal.

238

Explorer Operator Manual

NOTE: Each filter is protected by a piece of blue plastic. Remove the plastic before
installing the filter in Explorer.
4. Remove the Teflon/Polypropylene filter and install the new filter(MX396015).
5. Place the filter so that the Teflon side is facing down in the filter housing andthe mesh side is facing Explorer.
Handle the filter disk only by the edges. The mesh may be damaged orcontaminated by excessive handling. Use forceps or tweezers if possible.
6. Replace the filter housing.
NOTE: Calibrate all GC and TVOC modes before returning to normal operation.

NEVER operate Explorer without an inlet filter.
CAUTION

239

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance of the UV Lamp
During normal operation of the photoionization detector, the lamp window will
become coated with UV-absorbing material from the sample stream. This reduces
the lamp's effective light output and results in a substantial drop in the detector
response. Removal of the lamp and proper cleaning of the lamp window may restore
the detector sensitivity. As a guide, clean the GC lamp window every week.
If the lamp fault appears, the UV lamp has failed. Open the Status box in the GC
mode and check the Lamp Status. If a Timeout Fail or Intensity Fail is displayedthen the UV lamp must be replaced.

Removing the UV Lamp
Do not remove the UV lamp in hazardous locations.

WARNING
1. Ensure the instrument is turned off.

You must turn the instrument off before removing the lamp cover.

WARNING
2. Remove the lamp access cover using the hex driver supplied with the tool kit.
3. Use the multi-tool provided to remove the lamp housing cover.
4. Tilt Explorer slightly and remove the UV lamp.
240

Explorer Operator Manual

The lamp may be hot.

WARNING

Do not touch the detector cell. Any dust or dirt in the detector cell canbe blown out with a gentle jet of carrier gas.
CAUTION

Replacing the UV Lamp or Installing a New One
1. Place the new o-ring on the new lamp.
2. Without touching the lamp window, place the new lamp into Explorer
lampholder, window first.
NOTE: Do not insert any object, other than the UV lamp, into the lampholder.
3. Replace the lamp housing cover and then replace the access cover.
4. Calibrate the GC and TVOC and then continue normal operation.

Cleaning the UV Lamp Window
Since some UV inhibiting deposits are invisible to the eye, regular cleaning of thelamp window is strongly recommended. It is best to clean the lamp frequently, oncea month or more depending on the detector usage, to prevent a heavy build-up of
deposits that may be difficult to remove.

241

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

The UV lamp cleaning kit (MX380336) includes aluminum oxide (3.0 micron
powder) and cotton swabs. Additionally, you will require lint free tissues andapproximately 10 mL of methanol. When ordering methanol, specify Spectroscopic
Grade.

Never touch the UV lamp with your fingers.

WARNING
1. Remove the lamp as outlined above.
2. Allow the lamp to cool to room temperature.
This will avoid thermal shock, which could crack the window.
3. Remove the o-ring.
Do not allow the o-ring to come in contact with methanol, as methanol will
degrade the o-ring material and may result in leaks in your system.
4. Dampen a cotton swab in methanol and dab it into the cleaning compoundsupplied, allowing a small amount of the cleaning compound to adhere to thecotton tip.
5. Using small a circular motion, rub the cleaning compound onto the lamp
window for approximately one minute.
Do not exert excessive force onto the window, since the window can bepermanently damaged by misuse.
6. Dampen a new cotton swab with methanol and remove any trace amounts ofthe cleaning compound from the lamp window.
7. Wipe the window and the lamp with a dry, lint free tissue to remove any trace
amounts of the cleaning compound and methanol.
All traces of cleaning compound must be removed.

242

Explorer Operator Manual

8. Ensuring your hands are clean and dry, replace the o-ring.
Again, do not allow the o-ring to come in contact with methanol.
9. Without touching the lamp window, replace the lamp as outlined above.

243

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance of the Injection Port
Replacing the Injection Port Septum
A worn out septum causes leakage, which will result in poor reproducibility and an
unstable baseline. When an injection is made, the baseline will suddenly drop below
zero as the needle is pushed against the septum. This will also occur if the septum isimproperly seated in the injection port.
A silicone septum with a Teflon face (MX380320) is recommended for use
with Explorer. This type of septum will last for about 10 injections dependingon the syringe needle.

Septum Retainer
SeptumInjection Port
Cover

Figure 15 Replacing Septum
1. Move the instrument to an area where the ambient air contains no VOCs.
2. Unscrew the black septum retainer.
3. Use a syringe needle to withdraw the old septum.

244

Explorer Operator Manual

4. Ensuring that you do not touch the new septum with your fingers, place the
new septum, Teflon face down, in the injection port.
Tweezers should be used.
NOTE: Touching the septum with your fingers will lead to contamination of the system.
5. Position the septum in the injection port with the syringe needle and thencarefully screw the black retainer back in place.
Finger-tighten the retainer.
NOTE: The septum retainer must not be over tightened. This will cause unusual resistanceto needle penetration and may result in needle blockage.
6. The retainer should be tightened so that the septum is seated against the lower
half of the injection port assembly.
Coring of the septum can be reduced by using sidebore syringe needles.

Cleaning the Injection Port Assembly

Do not remove the injection port assembly. Removal opens Explorer’s
analytical engine to the environment.
CAUTION

245

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Flushing the Columns
NOTE: To avoid system contamination, do not allow the internal carrier gas cylinder toempty completely.
By definition, column packing or coating materials are very efficient adsorbers ofchemicals. If a column is left without continuous gas flow, contaminants present in
the air may enter through the ends of the column. These contaminants willaccumulate and when the column is put back into service the resumed flow of carriergas will carry a high concentration of contaminants into the detector. This will
decrease as the column cleans, but levels may be sufficiently high, initially, tosaturate the detector.
Saturation has occurred when the offset level is greater than 800 mV. At this point
the signal level can no longer be set to 10% of full scale at the start of an analysis.
Saturation can also occur if many high concentration samples are analyzed insuccession.
Saturation can often be reduced or eliminated by allowing carrier gas to flush thecolumn and detector for a few hours. Normally, columns that are not in use areflushed with a low flow of carrier gas. If possible, you can take the contaminatedcolumn out of service and use the remaining columns to run analyses. The
contaminated column will eventually be flushed and be available for use. To speed
up the flushing process, you may increase the carrier gas flow through thecontaminated column. If you use this procedure, you will not be able to run analyses
on the instrument while the columns are flushing.

Flushing a Single Column
1. Move the instrument to an area where the ambient air contains no VOCs.
2. If the instrument is auto-analyzing, disable that option.
3. Switch to supervisor mode by pressing Enter Menu, then SETUP and MODE,
then use the arrow keys to select Super.
4. Press Enter Menu and Exit.
246

Explorer Operator Manual

5. When the password is requested, enter 12344321 and press Enter Menu.
You are now in supervisor mode.
The password is factory set and cannot be changed.
6. Press SETUP, CONFIG, and COLUMN to select the column to be flushed.
7. Press SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, and PRESS to increase the flow throughthe columns.
Set the pressure to the maximum of 14 psig and allow the column to flush for a
few hours until the offset level returns to 200-800 mV.
NOTE: If the instrument is in user mode, you will not be able to increase the flow rate.
8. Ensure the internal carrier gas tank is full or connect the instrument to an
external tank of carrier gas as detailed in Carrier Gas starting on page 44.

Flushing all Three Columns
1. Move the instrument to an area where the ambient air contains no VOCs.
2. Connect a supply of carrier gas to the sample in port.
3. Use a clean gas bag filled with zero air or nitrogen, or if you are using apressurized supply of gas, set the delivery pressure to no more than 14 psig.
4. If the instrument is auto-analyzing, disable the option.
5. Switch to supervisor mode by pressing Enter Menu, then SETUP and MODE,
then use the arrow keys to select Super.
6. When the password is requested, enter 12344321 and press Enter Menu.
You are now in supervisor mode.
The password is factory set and cannot be changed.
7. Press SETUP, CONFIG, and COLUMN to select all the columns to be flushed.

247

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

8. Press SETUP, CONFIG, METHOD, and PRESS to increase the flow throughthe columns.
Set the pressure to the maximum of 14 psig.
NOTE: If the instrument is in user mode, you will not be able to increase the flow rate.
9. Enable auto-analyzing.
Explorer will cycle through the columns, injecting a sample of carrier gas onto
each column.
Continue cycling until the offset returns to a normal range of 200-800 mV.
10. Ensure the internal carrier gas tank is full or connect the instrument toan external tank of carrier gas as detailed in Carrier Gas starting on page
36.

248

Explorer Operator Manual

Purging the Internal Carrier Gas Cylinder
NOTE: To avoid instrument contamination, do not allow the cylinder to empty completely.
If the internal cylinder has been empty for any period of time, it must be purged toeliminate the possibility of system contamination. If you change carrier gas, youmust also flush and purge the internal tank with the new carrier gas.

Do not purge the cylinder in hazardous locations.

WARNING
1. Fill the internal cylinder with the carrier gas filling station as described in
Filling the Internal Cylinder on page 37.
2. Loosen the purge valve to empty the cylinder.
The purge valve is located below the carrier in port.
3. When the cylinder is empty, close the purge valve.
4. Fill the cylinder again.
5. Open the purge valve and empty the cylinder again.
6. Close the valve and fill the cylinder.
7. Run a sample of clean air to ensure no contamination has entered the system.
NOTE: Once you have filled the reservoir with carrier gas, you must allow the instrument topurge for 3-4 hours, preferably overnight. This will flush the analytical engine with
the new carrier gas.

249

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance of the ECD
Do not open Explorer or remove the ECD. If the ECD must be
removed from the instrument contact INFICON.
WARNINGYou are not authorized to clean the ECD. Do not put any cleaning
agents through the ECD.
WARNING

Purging the ECD
There are various indicators of GC contamination for an ECD.
Increased baseline level and reduced range.
Increased noise on the baseline.
Negative dips following large positive peaks
Reduced sensitivity.
If you are experiencing any of these problems, purge your ECD. If this does notcorrect the problem, then contact INFICON.
1. Move the instrument to an area where the ambient air contains no VOCs.
2. Switch to supervisor mode by pressing Enter Menu, then SETUP and MODE,
then use the arrow keys to select Super.
250

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Press Enter Menu and Exit and enter the password as 12344321 and press
Enter Menu.
You are now in supervisor mode.
NOTE: If the instrument is in user mode, you will not be able to increase the temperatureand pressure.
4. Increase the flow through the columns by pressing SETUP, CONFIG,METHOD, and PRESS and set the pressure to the maximum of 14 psi.
5. Increase the temperature to 80 C by pressing Enter Menu, then SETUP,CONFIG, METHOD, TEMP, and ECD and using the arrow keys to enter the
new ECD temperature, then press Enter Menu.
6. Ensure the internal carrier gas tank is full or connect the instrument to an
external tank of carrier gas.
You must use nitrogen carrier gas for the ECD
7. Allow the ECD to purge for at least 8 hours.
8. Change the view from the PID to the ECD by pressing DISPLAY, GC, andDET, and when prompted to change views to the ECD, press Enter Menu.
9. Monitor the offset level as displayed on the status screen and wait until it has
stabilized before attempting to use the instrument.
An instrument that is cleaning out will show an unstable and dropping baseline.
Typical offset is in the range 200-800 mV and anything over 800 mV indicatescontamination.

Obtaining an ECD Wipe Test Sample
NOTE: You must obtain a wipe test kit from an authorized laboratory or consulting firm,
see Wipe Test Agencies on page 367 for a list of agencies in the U.S. In Canada
you must use an agency, unless you have been authorized by the AECB to perform
wipe tests, contact the AECB for more information, see page 366. When ordering
a wipe test or a wipe test kit, specify that the sensitivity of the wipe test be 0.0001
microcurie. Ni63 is a beta emitter.

251

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Until the results of the wipe test are known, use caution and suitable
protection when handling equipment in contact with the ECD. Weardisposable plastic or rubber gloves when performing this test.
WARNING
1. Turn the instrument off and allow the detector to cool to the touch.
2. Remove the ECD access cover, as shown in Figure 16, using the hex driver
supplied with the tool kit for this purpose.
Do not lose the three hex screws.

Figure 16 Access to ECD for Wipe Testing
3. Using the instructions included with the wipe-test kit, wipe the all theaccessible metal surfaces of the detector with the cotton swab.
4. Wipe the vent fitting on the top panel of the Explorer, as shown in Figure 17.

252

Explorer Operator Manual

Figure 17 ECD Vent
5. Place the cotton swab in the container provided in the wipe-test kit and include
a data sheet stating that the wipe test was peerformed on a ECD, the serial
number of the instrument and the date of the test.
6. Replace the ECD access hatch.
7. Return the envelope to the leak testing center specified in the leak test kit andrequest that a new wipe-test kit be sent with the test results.

If the ECD does not pass the wipe test, contact INFICON
immediately.
WARNING253

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Disposing of an ECD Cell
If it is necessary to dispose of Explorer, equipped with an ECD, or to have the
ECD detector removed from Explorer, contact INFICON.
In addition, report the ECD cell disposal to the NRC:
Nuclear Material Safety and Safeguard
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
Washington, DC 20255
You may also need to report the cell disposal to your state and local agency. If you
are in an Agreement State, you must report the cell disposal to the state agency,
see Agreement States on page 362.
In Canada, you must report the proposed ECD cell disposal to the AECB before
you dispose of the cell, see page 366.

254

Explorer Operator Manual

Downloading Firmware to Explorer
Explorer has been designed so that you can easily download the newest version of
firmware to the instrument. You do not need to open the instrument and remove
the current EPROM, you simply connect Explorer to a PC and download thefirmware to the EPROM.
In order to establish communication with Explorer and send data, the PC must be
set up to emulate a terminal. In order to do this you will need a communications
software package that will allow you to transfer data from the PC to Explorer. If you
are using Microsoft Windows you do not need to purchase any separate software,
Windows contains a communication program called Terminal Program orHyperTerminal depending on which version of Windows you are running.
You will use the communication or terminal emulation software package to set up
the PC to send data at 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. Refer to themanual, provided with your software, for specific details.
The instructions below will provide you with the most basic information for using
Explorer with HyperTerminal. In order to use HyperTerminal, you must be
familiar with Windows 32-bit 7 or 8 and it must be installed and running on yourPC. HyperTerminal is no longer supplied with Windows 32-bit 7 or 8, but can be
downloaded for free online. Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide fordetailed instructions on installation and operation of Windows 32-bit 7 or 8 andHyperTerminal. If you are using another software package, please refer to yoursoftware’s user manual for specific details of operation.

255

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1. Turn Explorer off.
2. Attach the AC adapter to Explorer must be connected to the AC adapter
in order to download firmware.
3. Connect Explorer to the PC as described in Connecting the PC to Explorer on
page 96.
4. Open your communications software.
If you are using HyperTerminal, start Windows and then start HyperTerminal.
HyperTerminal may be in the Accessories Program Group. Its location will
depend on how you have set up Windows. Double-click Hypertrm.exe to run
the program.
5. Create and save a configuration file, so that each time you use thecommunications software with Explorer you can load this file. Enter a name foryour configuration file, then select an icon and press OK.
6. In HyperTerminal, the Phone number dialog box will now open, move to thelast option, Connect Using and select direct connection.
7. Select the port to which Explorer is connected and click OK.
Select COM2 if you are using COM2.
8. Set the following:

256

Bits per Second (bps)9600

Data Bits

8

ParityNone

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

NoneExplorer Operator Manual

9. Click OK.
10. Save your configuration file.
The next time you open the HyperTerminal window, select your configuration
file instead of Hypertrm.exe. This will load HyperTerminal and set it up to
send data to Explorer.
11. To configure Explorer to receive new firmware, switch Explorer on, whilepressing the leftmost, and two rightmost soft keys, as shown in Figure 18.
The display will be very dim, and the Ready LED will be on.
If the unit has been successfully connected a series of characters may bedisplayed. This verifies the connection between the PC and Explorer.

Figure 18 Configuring Explorer to Receive Firmware
12. The file is in binary format so select the appropriate protocol. In
HyperTerminal, open the Transfers menu and select Send File, enter the
Location and Name of your file, select 1KXmodem as the protocol and click
Send.
Your communication software will display a window showing the transmission
status. When the file has been sent the dialog box will close.
Once the file has been completely downloaded, the three LEDs on the Explorer
will light in sequence. The Green LED will flash initially, then the Yellow
LED, lastly the Red LED will flash. The LEDs indicate that Explorer has erased
its old program and installed the new one.
257

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

13. Explorer will display the “System Reset, cold started” dialog box. Press the
Exit button.
14. Download your assay using SiteChart and allow 30 minutes for Explorer tostabilize and then calibrate the instrument.

258

Explorer Operator Manual

Updating Assays
Due to the nature of gas chromatography, it is necessary to update the assay
information periodically. If you are using a single assay and calibrating the
instrument daily this will not be too difficult. If you are using more than one assay, it
becomes more important to update the assays that you do not use frequently. If thisis done you will be able to load the assay when it is required and calibrate theinstrument quickly.
If the assays are not maintained, then you will need to update all the library
information before you will be able to accurately calibrate each assay library.
Although this is not difficult, it can be time consuming. If the instrument is to be
used on short notice, it is imperative that you update your assays on a monthly basis
or more frequently as necessary.
In order to update the assay you must have calibration gas for each assay. If you
have customized an assay for a specific application you may only need to update
your custom assay. If on the other hand, you may need all the assay compounds atsome time in the future you must update all assay compounds. In either case, thecalibration gas must contain all the compounds of interest.
NOTE: Always update the copy of the assay that is saved on your local drive. Do not update
the original disk.

Updating Compound Retention Time and Response
The following procedure will update retention time and response information foreach library compound. Response information will be updated based on the single
concentration contained in the calibration gas.
NOTE: This procedure is performed with the SiteChart software, see the chapter starting on
page 99, for more information.
1. You must use a PC and the SiteChart software to update the assays.
2. Turn Explorer on.

259

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

3. In SiteChart, select the Assay tab.
4. Open the assay and click Send to Explorer.
Once the file has been downloaded, allow at least 30 minutes for Explorer toreach the assay set points.
5. Select the first column/detector pair.
If your application uses 2 or 3 columns you must repeat this procedure for eachcolumn.
If you are using the ECD, you must repeat this procedure for each ECD library.
6. Run a chromatogram on the selected column/detector pair.
The chromatogram must contain all the compounds listed in your library.
7. Select the Assay tab, and select Open from the File menu to open thechromatogram that was just run.
8. Select Re-integrate from the Analyzer menu to re-integrate the chromatogram.
Compounds matching library information will be identified.
9. Click on the first compound in the library.
10. Review the data in the library information box.
Compounds present in the calibration gas must be selected for calibration.
Compounds that are not present in the calibration gas must be removed fromthe library.
NOTE: All compounds contained in the library must be contained in the calibration gas.
11. Ensure you have entered the correct calibration concentration.
This is the concentration of the compound in your calibration gas.
Blue dashed lines will be displayed where SiteChart is expecting to find thecompound.

260

Explorer Operator Manual

12. If the compound peak is the only peak within the retention time window, click
Update or double-click on the peak to open the Update dialog. If theinformation in the box is not correct, enter the correct data and click OK.
OR
If the compound peak is not within the retention time window or if there areother peaks in the retention time window, drag the center, blue, dashed line tothe desired peak and the retention time will be updated automatically.
13. Repeat this procedure for each library compound.
14. Select Re-integrate from the Analyzer menu.
Each compound should be correctly identified.
15. If you are using another column for your application, repeat this procedure forthe next column.
16. Save the assay and then send it to Explorer.
17. Using SiteChart, switch to the Instrument tab and run an analysis on eachcolumn.
18. Ensure all compounds are correctly identified and then use these analyses tocalibrate Explorer.

Updating the Calibration Curve
After you have updated the compound retention times you can also update thecalibration curve for each library compound. It is not necessary to update thecalibration curves, but multiple point calibration will provide the most accurate
response.
1. In the SiteChart software, select the Assay tab.
2. Select the column/detector combination required for your compound.
Ensure your compound is already listed in the library.
261

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

3. Ensure Explorer is on and ready for operation.
4. Connect a sample to the Sample In port and begin a run.
5. When the analysis is complete, select the Assay tab and use Open from theFile menu to open the file that was just run.
The chromatogram will be displayed in the window
6. Double-click on the peak in the chromatogram and enter the concentration.
7. Normally, you will use a linear calibration curve, select Linear and SiteChart
will update the calibration curve to incorporate the new point.
8. If you have more than one compound at a different concentration then repeat
the procedure for the other peaks in the chromatogram.
9. Perform another run at another concentration and store the compound andrepeat this procedure for all available concentrations.
10. If you need to remove a concentration point, select the point in thearea/concentration table and click Erase.
During calibration, the single point that is contained in the calibration gas is used to
update the curve.

262

Explorer Operator Manual

Backup Assay Files
Make a copy of all the updated assay files and store this backup disk in a safe placewith the original assay CD. In addition to the assay file (.app) you should also store
the .pid and .ecd files that were used to update the assay.
Each time you update the assay information using the procedures above, you must
copy the updated assay and related files to your backup disk.
NOTE: Do not copy the updated files onto the original assay disk.
Always retain the original assay, as it contains the reference library. If for somereason you must use the original assay, you must update the library information.
Remember to copy the original files from the disk to your local drive and thenupdate them.

263

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Explorer fault conditions and the necessary corrective action are listed inthis chapter. In addition, basic troubleshooting procedures are provided forsome problems that may occur during normal operation.
If you have a service related question about Explorer, consult this manual first. If
you cannot find the answer in this documentation, contact INFICON.
When you call, you should have your Explorer in front of you. You should also
have this manual at hand. Lastly, please have the following information ready:A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem
occurred.
Any corrective action that you have already tried.
The exact wording of any messages that appeared on the display.

GC Fault Conditions
If there is more than one fault occurring at a time, the instrument will cycle throughthem and display them one at time until they are corrected. If one of three criticalfaults occurs then analyses will stop being run until the fault clears. The three
critical faults are: Lamp Fault, Oven Not Ready Fault and Pressure Fault.
Lamp Fault
Cause: The UV lamp could not be started.
Action: Turn Explorer off and then on again and allow the lamp to tune. If thefault persists, replace the lamp as outlined Replacing the UV Lamp or Installing a
New One on page 245.

264

Explorer Operator Manual

Oven Not Ready Fault
Cause: The oven is not within 1 C of the set temperature.
Action: From a cold start the oven will require 20-30 minutes to reach the set
temperature. If you have loaded a new method or manually adjusted the oventemperature allow 20-30 minutes for the oven to reach the set point and stabilize.
Cause: If you are in ECD view, this fault refers to the ECD oven.
Action: From a cold start, both the column oven and the ECD oven will require 2030 minutes to reach the set temperature. If you have loaded a new method or
manually adjusted the oven temperature allow 20-30 minutes for both ovens to reachthe set point and stabilize.
If the ECD reaches its set temperature before the column and PID, the Oven Not
Ready Fault will clear, but an oven fault condition remains. A fault status will be
displayed until the column and PID reach their set point.
Cause: The ambient temperature is below 0 C (32 F) or above 40 C (105 F).
Action: Move Explorer to a more controlled environment: indoors or inside
a vehicle.
Pressure Fault
Cause: The pressure in the internal carrier gas cylinder is low.
Action: Refill the internal tank as described in Filling the Internal Cylinder on
page 44 or connect the instrument to an external supply of carrier gas as described inConnecting Carrier Gas on page 48.
Cause: The external supply of carrier gas is not connected properly.
Action: Ensure there are no leaks in the supply lines and that the delivery pressure is
set to 100 psig.
Cause: The Explorer is not within 0.5 psi of its set pressure.

265

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Action: Verify that pressure is set between 4 and 14 psi. If it is set correctly,
contact INFICON.
Calibration Fault
Cause: The last calibration run was unsuccessful. Depending on the source of the
problem there are different ways to correct this fault.
Action: If pressurized calibration gas is being used, ensure the delivery pressure ismaintained at no more than 14 psig.
Cause: Calibration gas has deteriorated.
Action: Ensure the calibration gas is still of a reliable concentration and that allcompounds are still contained in the calibration gas.
NOTE: Due to the nature of some compounds, some calibration mixes are not stable forextended periods. Check with your specialty gas supplier for details.
Cause: Calibration compounds are not selected for calibration in the library.
Action: Ensure the compounds contained in the calibration mix are enabled in thelibrary.
Cause: Compounds stored in the library are not being used for calibration.
Action: Open the library and enter the concentration of each compound in thecalibration gas.
Cause: Calibration peaks are not being recognized.
Action: If the method has been changed, that is flow rates, oven temperature, etc.,
calibration peaks may have moved out of the peak recognition window. You should
clear the library, run a chromatogram with the new settings and store the compounds
of interest in the new library. If the peaks have drifted out of the peak recognition
window, you must update the library values, see Updating Library Information on
page 110.

266

Explorer Operator Manual

Low Battery Fault
Cause: The battery pack must be recharged.
Action: Connect the instrument to an AC supply using the AC adapter or replace
the battery pack with a fully charged one as discussed in Battery Pack on page 32.
Datalogger Full Fault
Cause: The internal memory of the Explorer is full.
Action: Delete any old analyses. If you need all the information in the datalogger,
download the contents of the datalogger to PC running the SiteChart software. The
contents of the datalogger is automatically deleted after the contents is downloaded
to the PC.
Ambient Temp Fault
Cause: Ambient temperature is outside of operating temperature range.
Action: Move Explorer to a controlled environment, that is, in a vehicle with theheating or air conditioning running or indoors, or bring the sample to Explorer in gas
bags, glass vessels or syringes.
Over Range Fault
Cause: The PID or ECD is saturated.
Action: Saturation has occurred when the offset level is greater than 800 mV. At thispoint the signal level can no longer be set to 10% of full scale at the start of ananalysis. Saturation can also occur if many high concentration samples are analyzed
in succession. Allow the detector to flush until the offset level returns to 200-800
mV. If necessary, increase the pressure and flush the detector as described in
Purging the ECD on page 254.

267

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Chromatographic Troubleshooting
Problem: No peaks appear
Cause: Improper method settings.
Action: Ensure the correct Method is loaded or check that the foreflush duration islong enough to allow the sample to fill the loop and clear the precolumn before
backflush begins.
Cause: Leak in the injection port.
Action: Replace the injection port septum as described in Replacing the
Injection Port Septum on page 248.
Cause: If syringe injection is being used, the syringe needle may be blocked.
Action: If the syringe plunger does not move smoothly this is an indication that theneedle is blocked. Use the fine wire supplied with the syringe to clean the needle orreplace the needle.
Cause: The sample was injected onto the wrong column.
Action: Ensure you have selected the correct column for your application.
Cause: No sample at sample in port.
Action: If you are using a gas bag, ensure the gas bag valve is open.
Cause: Sample inlet filter is blocked.
Action: Replace the sample inlet filter as described in Replacing the Sample
Inlet Filter on page 242.
Cause: The filter in the telescoping sample probe is blocked.
Action: Replace the filter in the telescoping sample probe, as described in
Replacing the Filter on page 45.

268

Explorer Operator Manual

Problem: Sensitivity is too low
Cause: Calibration gas pressure is low.
Action: Check the calibration gas pressure and replace the tank if necessary.
Cause: Incorrect calibration gas.
Action: Ensure the calibration gas contains all of the compounds listed in the library.
Each library compound must be identified as a calibration compound.
Cause: Calibration gas is not pressurized properly.
Action: Ensure the delivery pressure is maintained at no more than 14 psig.
Cause: Calibration gas has deteriorated.
Action: Replace the calibration gas tank.
NOTE: Some calibration mixes are not stable for extended periods. Check with yourspecialty gas supplier for details.
Cause: UV lamp is failing.
Action: Replace the UV lamp, as detailed in Replacing the UV Lamp or Installinga New One on page 245.
Cause: The ECD is contaminated.
Action: Set the detector temperature to 80 C and increase the pressure to 14 psi.
Allow the detector to purge under these conditions for at least 8 hours as
detailed in Purging the ECD on page 254, or contact INFICON.

269

Maintenance and Troubleshooting: Do not open the instrument or attempt to remove the ECD. If the ECD
must be removed from the instrument, contact INFICON.
WARNING
Cause: Sample inlet filter is dirty.
Action: Replace the sample inlet filter as described in Replacing the Sample
Inlet Filter on page 242.
Cause: The filter in the telescoping sample probe is blocked.
Action: Replace the filter in the telescoping sample probe, as described in
Replacing the Filter on page 45.
Cause: Improper method settings.
Action: Ensure the correct Method is loaded or check that the foreflush time is longenough to allow the sample to fill the loop and clear the precolumn before backflush
begins.
Cause: Leak in the injection port.
Action: Replace the injection port septum as detailed in Replacing the Injection
Port Septum on page 248 or ensure the injection port retainer has been tightened
down. The retainer should be finger-tight, do not over- tighten.
Cause: If syringe injection is being used, the syringe needle may be blocked.
Action: If the syringe plunger does not move smoothly, the needle may be blocked.
Use the fine wire supplied with the syringe to clean the needle or replace the needle.

270

Explorer Operator Manual

Cause: Pieces of cored septum have fallen down inside the injection port.
Action: Remove the injection port and clean it as outlined in Cleaning the
Injection Port Assembly on page 249.
Problem: Peak appears but is not recognizedCause: Compounds have drifted from original assay retention time values.
Action: Update the compound library and once the library has been updated save thenew values. You must do this for each column/detector pair.
Cause: Peak is not stored in the library.
Action: Ensure the compound peak is stored in the library.
Cause: Retention time window is too small.
Action: Adjust the window percent as discussed on page 115.
Cause: The sample was injected onto the wrong column.
Action: Ensure you have selected the correct column for your application. Refer tothe user notes provided with your assay.
Cause: Flow rates are not set correctly.
Action: Ensure the pressure settings are correct for your application. Refer to theuser notes supplied with your assay.
Problem: Peaks appear too slowly
Cause: Pressure is too low resulting in low detector flow rates.
Action: Check for a pressure fault and ensure the internal carrier gas cylinder is full,or ensure the pressure setting is correct for the selected method.

271

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Cause: Temperature is too low.
Action: Increase the oven temperature and ensure the temperature setting is correct
for the selected method. Refer to the user’s notes supplied with your assay. Allow 20
to 30 minutes for the instrument to stabilize.
Cause: The sample was injected onto the wrong column.
Action: Ensure you have selected the correct column for your application. Refer tothe user notes provided with your assay.
Problem: Peaks appear too quickly
Cause: Pressure is too high resulting in high detector flow rates.
Action: Adjust the carrier gas pressure and ensure the pressure setting is correct forthe selected method. Refer to the user’s notes provided with your assay.
Cause: Column temperature is too high.
Action: Reduce the oven temperature and ensure the temperature setting is correct
for the selected method. Allow 20 to 30 minutes for the instrument to stabilize.
Cause: The sample was injected onto the wrong column.
Action: Ensure you have selected the correct column for your application. Refer tothe user notes provided with your assay.
Problem: Baseline drifts up and down
Cause: Instrument is adapting to large temperature changes.
Action: Increase the oven temperature to ensure isothermal conditions. Allow the
instrument to stabilize for 20 to 30 minutes.

272

Explorer Operator Manual

Cause: Instrument is adapting to change of the PID sensitivity (gain switch).
Action: Increase the pump time to 20 seconds. After the gain is switched,
Explorer begins to stabilize the offset during the pump time.
Cause: Column is recovering from earlier contamination.
Action: Increase the pressure and flush the column, as detailed in Flushing
the Columns on page 250.
Cause: Components of the last analysis are still on the column.
Action: Purge the column as above, but decrease the backflush duration to flush out
the heavier compounds. If the heavier compounds must be detected, adjust theanalysis time so these compounds have enough time to clear the column. Also,
ensure you have selected the correct column for your application.
Cause: Contamination in the external carrier gas cylinder.
Action: Switch to an alternate carrier gas tank.
Cause: Contamination in the internal carrier gas cylinder.
Action: Purge the internal tank as outlined in Purging the Internal Carrier
Gas Cylinder on page 253.
NOTE: To prevent contamination from entering Explorer's pneumatic system, do not allow
the internal tank to empty completely.
Cause: Peaks are appearing from the previous analysis.
Action: Decrease the foreflush time or increase the analysis time.

273

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Cause: Blockage at the detector vent ports.
Action: Ensure the ports are not covered or blocked in any way.
The detector out ports vent the effluent from the PID (port 1) and ECD(port 2). The pressure set by the method will determine the outlet flow
rates at these ports. If the detector is not in use Explorer supplies amaintenance flow to ensure the detector is ready for operation.
Samples drawn by the pump to fill and flush the sampling system are vented
through the pump out port. The flow though this port is approximately
250 ml/min when the pump is on.
The two columns that are not in use are flushed constantly withapproximately 1 mL/min. The two columns are both vented through the ventout port.
Cause: The ECD is contaminated.
Action: Set the detector temperature to 80 C and increase the pressure to 14 psig.
Allow the detector to purge under these conditions for at least 8 hours as detailedin Purging the ECD on page 254, or contact INFICON

Do not open the instrument or attempt to remove the ECD. If the
ECD must be removed from the instrument, contact INFICON.
WARNING
Cause: Pieces of cored septum have fallen down inside the injection port.
Action: Remove the injection port and clean it as outlined in Cleaning the
Injection Port Assembly on page 249.

274

Explorer Operator Manual

Problem: There are negative dips following large positive peaks in thechromatogram
Cause: The ECD is contaminated.
Action: Set the detector temperature to 80 C and the increase the pressure to 14
psi, or contact INFICON.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to remove the ECD. If the
ECD must be removed from the instrument, contact INFICON.
WARNING
Problem: Signal level too highCause: Components of the last analysis are still on the column.
Action: Purge the column and decrease the backflush duration to flush out theheavier compounds. If the heavier compounds must be detected, adjust the analysis
time so these compounds have enough time to clear the analytical column, or ensure
you have selected the correct column for your application.
Cause: The ECD is contaminated.
Action: Set the detector temperature to 80 C and the increase the pressure to 14
psi, or contact INFICON.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to remove the ECD. If the
ECD must be removed from the instrument, contact INFICON.
WARNING275

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Problem: Peak cannot be integrated
Cause: Min Area or Min Height values are set too high.
Action: Lower the values of Min Area or Min Height. If you are not using autointegrate, turn the option on and re-integrate the chromatogram.
Problem: A value of zero is displayed, even though a valid number wasenteredCause: Exit was pressed, instead of Enter Menu to confirm the entry.
Action: Type the number into the input box, ensure it is correct and then press Enter
Menu.
Cause: Exit was pressed before the value was complete.
Action: Type the number into the input box, ensure it is correct and then press Enter
Menu.
Cause: The value you have entered is beyond the allowable range for the instrument
Action: Type a valid number into the input box, ensure it is correct and then press
Enter Menu.

276

Assay 1
User Notes

8

Assay 1 User Notes

An Overview of Assay 1
Assay 1 consists of 40 compounds that belong to the TO-14 priority pollutant
list. Explorer has been configured to separate and resolve as many of these target
compounds as possible. However, with the standard method there are some coelutions. As this method has been optimized to separate as many of these 40compounds as possible, this method may be impractical if your compounds ofinterest are a small subgroup of the Assay 1 compounds.
An electron capture detector (ECD) is available for Explorer. The ECD must be
installed in order to detect some of the compounds to which the PID is lesssensitive. Compounds identified as ECD compounds may not be detectable if yourinstrument does not contain an ECD.
The information in these user’s notes will help you determine how to create yourown library of compounds using the information that has been stored in the Assay 1
reference library.

The Assay 1 Disk
Two types of files are included on the assay disks. Application (or method) files
have the extension .app. Method files are loaded through the Assay tab in the
SiteChart software and are used to program Explorer.
Chromatograms from the photoionization detector are identified as .pid files.
Assay1A.pid, Assay1B.pid and Assay1C.pid are sample chromatograms from yourinstrument. Chromatograms from the electron capture detector are identified as .ecd
files. Assay1A.ecd, Assay1B.ecd and Assay1C.ecd are also sample chromatogramsfrom your instrument. The .ecd files are only included if an ECD has been installed
in your instrument.
Assay1.app
Assay1A.ecd

Assay1B.ecd
Assay1C.ecd

Assay1A.pid
Assay1B.pid
Assay1C.pid

Make a copy of all the files on the assay disk and use this as your working disk.
Store the original disk in a safe location.
278

Explorer Operator Manual

Installation
1. Copy the files onto the PC as described in Installing your Assay Disk on page95.
2. Load the assay into Explorer as described in Loading an Assay into Explorer on
page 98.
NOTE: The Assay 1 (Environmental) method is specific to an Assay 1 instrument. You
cannot install components of Assay 1 on an instrument configured for another assay.

279

Assay 1 User Notes

Compound Separation
Separation of the 40 compounds is accomplished in three separate runs in which theheavy, mid-range, and light compounds of the sample are directed to Columns A, B,
C, respectively, for analysis.
The heavy compounds are analyzed on Column A. Any lighter compounds present
in the sample are not well separated and elute as an early series of peaks. The
integration delay can be used to prevent these peaks from being included in the peakreport and from being identified in the chromatogram. See Figure 19 and Figure 20.
For a run on Column A, the analytical column is also the precolumn. Backflush can
only begin after the last compound of interest elutes. The system must thenbackflush, for a time slightly greater than the retention time of the last compound ofinterest. The resulting analysis time should be approximately twice the backflushtime.
The maximum Explorer analysis time is 3200 seconds. If any heavy
compounds have not been backflushed from Column A by this time, it may benecessary to delay the start of the next analysis until the necessary time has
elapsed (2 x backflush time).

Figure 19 Column A Compounds on the PID

280

Explorer Operator Manual

Figure 20 Column A Compounds on the ECD
Figure 19 shows the six compounds analyzed on Column A. Two of these aredetected by the ECD, as shown in Figure 20.
The mid-range compounds are analyzed on Column B, with Column A acting as theprecolumn. The sample is injected onto Column A, and the heavy compounds areprevented from entering Column B by adjusting the backflush time. The light andmid-range compounds are allowed to pass from Column A to Column B. Before theheavy compounds are able to pass into Column B, the flow is reversed, and theheavy compounds are backflushed off Column A.
Some separation of mid-range compounds occurs on Column A, with the majority ofthe separation occurring on Column B. Any light compounds present in the sample
are not separated and elute as an early peak, well separated from the Column B
compounds. The integration delay can be used to prevent this composite peak frombeing included in the peak report.
The PID detects all of the 19 compounds analyzed on Column B, Figure 21 shows
12 of these. The ECD detects six of the 19 compounds, Figure 22 shows three ofthese.

281

Assay 1 User Notes

Figure 21 Column B Compounds on the PID

Figure 22 Column B Compounds on the ECD
The light compounds are analyzed on Column C, with Column A acting as theprecolumn. As before, the mid-range and heavy compounds are prevented fromentering Column C by adjusting the backflush time. In this case only the lightcompounds are allowed to pass from Column A to Column C, all other compounds
are backflushed out of the system. No real separation of the light compounds occurs
on Column A. All of the separation occurs on Column C.

282

Explorer Operator Manual

Figure 23 Column C Compounds on the PID

Figure 24 Column C Compounds on the ECD
The PID detects 16 of the 17 compounds analyzed on Column C, Figure 23 shows
12 of these. The ECD detects six of the 16 compounds, Figure 24 shows four ofthese.

283

Assay 1 User Notes

Co-elutions
Assay Wizard runs automatically when you load an assay that contains co-elutions.
It will prompt you to select one compound from a list of possible co-elutions.
1. Select a single compound of interest from each list.
2. Save this modified application file to a different filename.
NOTE: Bypassing Assay Wizard may result in co-eluting compounds being misidentified by
Explorer.
Whether or not a compound pair will co-elute will depend on the instrument and therelative concentrations of the components within the sample. Often co-elutions canbe resolved by modifying the standard method, if the sample matrix permits.
There are 5 possible co-elutions on Column B:
1,2-dichloropropane and 1,2-dichloroethane - These compounds are separated
on Column C, using the standard method.
Toluene and tetrachloroethylene - These compounds may be separated bymodifying the Column B method.
They could also be analyzed on Column A.
Tetrachloroethylene can be quantified on the ECD if an ECD has been
installed.
2-Choroethyl vinyl ether and cis-1,3-dichloro-propene - These compounds are
separated on Column A using the standard method, and may by separated bymodifying the Column B method.
m-Xylene and p-xylene - These compounds cannot usually be resolved.
You can try modifying the Column B method to separate these compounds, butthat may in turn effect other separations.
o-Xylene and chlorobenzene - These compounds may be separated bymodifying the Column B method.
284

Explorer Operator Manual

There are 5 possible co-elutions on Column C.
Bromomethane and chloroethane - Chloroethane and bromomethane coelute on all 3 columns and cannot be resolved by Explorer.
Dichloromethane and 1,1-dichloroethylene - These compounds are separated
on Column B, using the standard method.
t-1,2-Dichloroethylene and vinyl acetate - These compounds may be separated
on either Column B or C, using modified methods.
1,2-Dichloroethane and 1,1,1-trichloroethane - These compounds are separated
on Column B, using the standard method.
Carbon tetrachloride and benzene - These can be resolved by the detectors, as
the PID is not sensitive to carbon tetrachloride, and the ECD does not detectbenzene.
NOTE: Some of the co-elutions listed above may actually be resolved on your specificinstrument.

Compound Library
There are three standard compound libraries - one for each column. The libraries
contain retention time and response information for each of the assay compounds.
These libraries have been determined for the Assay 1 standard method, if the method
is altered, these libraries are no longer valid and a new library must be created,
identifying the compounds with their new retention times and calibration
information. For example, if the column temperature of Column B is increased, theretention times in the Column B library are no longer valid, since compounds will be
eluting faster than they would in the standard method. You would have to run thecompounds with the new settings and store the compounds in the Library, as
discussed in Compound Library on page 113.

285

Assay 1 User Notes

Assay 1 Standard Method
The Assay 1 standard method is installed on your Explorer and this method includes
settings for each column. The table below provides typical settings, the exact values
will be specific to your instrument.
Column A

Column B

Column C

Analysis Time (S)

3200

2100

1000

Oven Temperature ( C)

60

60

60

ECD Oven Temp. ( C)

60

60

60

Pressure (psi)

8

8

8

PID State

High Sensitivity

High Sensitivity

High Sensitivity

ECD State (if installed)

On

On

On

Inject Method

Loop Injection

Loop Injection

Loop Injection

Inject Time (S)

2

2

2

Pump Time (S)

20

20

20

Backflush Time (S)

1810

480

115

Automatic Integration

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Slope Up (mV/S)

0.5

0.5

0.3

Slope Down (mV/S)

1.0

1.0

1.0

Min. Height (mV)

0.0

0.0

0.0

Min. Area (mV S)

0.0

0.0

0.0

Filter Level

3

3

3

Integration Delay (S)

400

250

100

MethodInjection Method

PID Integration Method286

Explorer Operator Manual

ECD Integration Method
Automatic Integration

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Slope Up (mV/S)

1.0

0.5

1.0

Slope Down (mV/S)

1.0

1.0

1.0

Min. Height (mV)

0.0

0.0

0.0

Min. Area (mV S)

0.0

0.0

0.0

Filter Level

2

2

2

Integration Delay (S)

400

250

100

Standard Assay Library Compounds
The table below lists all the Assay 1 compounds alphabetically. Long compound
names have been abbreviated to meet the 15 character limit of Explorer’s display.
The table also shows the abbreviations that will appear in the compound library.
Compound Name

Library Name

AcetoneAcetoneBenzeneBenzeneBromodichloromethane

BDCmethane

Bromoform

Bromoform

Bromomethane

Bromomethane

Carbon Disulfide

CarbonDisulfide

Carbon Tetrachloride

Carbon Tet

Chlorobenzene

Chlorobenzene

Chloroethane

Chloroethane

2-Chloroethyl Vinyl Ether

2-CEvinyl Ether

Chloroform

Chloroform

287

Assay 1 User Notes

Compound Name

288

Library Name

Chloromethane

Chloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

DBCmethane

1,2-Dichlorobenzene

1,2-DCbenzene

1,3-Dichlorobenzene

1,3-DCbenzene

1,4-Dichlorobenzene

1,4-DCbenzene

1,2-Dichloroethane

1,2-DCE

1,1-Dichloroethylene

1,1-DCethylene

c-1,2-Dichloroethylene

c1,2-DCethylene

t-1,2-Dichloroethylene

t1,2-DCethylene

1,2-Dichloropropane

1,2-DCpropane

c-1,3-Dichloropropene

c-1,3-DCpropene

t-1,3-Dichloropropene

t-1,3-DCpropene

Ethylbenzene

Ethylbenzene

2-Hexanone

2-Hexanone

Methyl Ethyl Ketone

MEK

Methyl Isobutyl Ketone

MIBK

Methylene Chloride

Dichloromethane

StyreneStyrene1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane

1,1,2,2-TetraCE

Tetrachloroethylene

TetraCethylene

TolueneToluene1,1,1-Trichloroethane

1,1,1-TCE

1,1,2-Trichloroethane

1,1,2-TCethane

Trichloroethylene

TCethylene

Explorer Operator Manual

Compound Name

Library Name

Vinyl Acetate

Vinyl Acetate

Vinyl Chloride

Vinyl Chloride

m-Xylene

m-Xyleneo-Xyleneo-Xylenep-Xylenep-Xylene

The tables below show which compounds are typically run on each column for the
standard method. Compounds calibrated on one column may be run on another, but
optimum separation of all 40 compounds is provided with this method. The librarylistings are in alphabetical order for ease of reference.
Column A - PID Library
Compound Name
Bromoform
1,2-Dichlorobenzene
1,3-Dichlorobenzene

1,4-Dichlorobenzene
Styrene1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane

Column A - ECD Library
Compound Name
Bromoform

1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane

Column B - PID Library
Compound Name
Bromodichloromethane
Benzene
Chlorobenzene
2-Chloroethyl Vinyl Ether
Dibromochloromethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloropropane

2-Hexanone
MIBK
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
Trichloroethylene
Tetrachloroethylene
Toluenem-Xylene289

Assay 1 User Notes

c-1,3-Dichloropropene
t-1,3-Dichloropropene
Ethylbenzene

o-Xylenep-Xylene

Column B - ECD Library
Compound Name
Bromodichloromethane
Dibromochloromethane
1,2-Dichloroethane

t-1,3-Dichloropropene
Tetrachloroethylene
Trichloroethylene

Column C - PID Library
Compound Name
AcetoneBenzeneBromomethane
Carbon Disulfide
Chloroethane
Chloroform
Chloromethane
Dichloromethane

1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethylene
c-1,2-Dichloroethylene
t-1,2-Dichloroethylene
MEK
1,1,1-Trichloroethane
Vinyl Acetate
Vinyl Chloride

Column C - ECD Library
Compound Name
Carbon Disulfide
CarbonTetrachloride
Chloroform

290

1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethylene
1,1,1-TrichloroethaneExplorer Operator Manual

Compound Elution Order
The following tables list the elution order and typical retention times for all Assay 1
compounds on each column. This information will be needed if you are customizing
the standard method. Heavy compounds, such as 1,2-Dichlorobenzene, are notgenerally analyzed on the more retentive Columns B and C, since retention times
will be unacceptably long.
The information in these tables is for reference only. Retention times will vary on
your instrument, and exact retention times for your instrument, are contained in the
Assay1.app file.
Compounds with retention times differing by 6% or less are defined as co-elutions
and are indicated as such in the tables. Some compounds identified as co-elutions
may be resolved on your instrument.
Also indicated are the compounds that are optimally detected with an ECD, thesecompounds may also be detected on the PID with reduced sensitivity.
Column A Elution Order
Compound

ECD

R.T. (S)Co-elution

Vinyl Chloride

59

Yes

Chloromethane

59

Yes

Bromomethane

63

Yes

Acetone68

Yes

1,1-Dichloroethylene

68

Yes

Dichloromethane

72

Yes

Carbon Disulfide

73

Yes

Chloroethane

73

Yes

t-1,2-Dichloroethylene

74

Yes

Vinyl Acetate

77

Yes
291

Assay 1 User Notes

Compound

R.T. (S)Co-elution

Methyl Ethyl Ketone

84

Yes

c-1,2-Dichloroethylene

86

Yes

Chloroform

Yes

92

Yes

1,1,1-Trichloroethane

Yes

93

Yes

Carbon tetrachloride

Yes

97

Yes

Benzene102

Yes

1,2-Dichloroethane

103

Yes

2-Chloroethyl Vinyl
Ether

114

Yes

Trichloroethylene

114

Yes

1,2-Dichloropropane

121

No

132

Yes

Methyl Isobutyl Ketone

138

Yes

c-1,3-Dichloropropene

150

No

Toluene159

No

t-1,3-Dichloropropene

178

No

2-Hexanone

184

Yes

1,1,2-Trichloroethane

189

Yes

Tetrachloroethylene

190

Yes

231

No

Chlorobenzene

278

Yes

p-Xylene

280

Yes

Ethylbenzene

280

Yes

m-Xylene

281

Yes

Bromodichloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

292

ECD

Yes

Yes

Explorer Operator Manual

Compound

ECD

R.T. (S)Co-elution

o-Xylene

349

No

Styrene370

No

Bromoform

Yes

459

No

1,1,2,2Tetrachloroethane

Yes

506

No

1,3-Dichlorobenzene

832

No

1,4-Dichlorobenzene

908

No

1,2-Dichlorobenzene

1116

No

R.T. (S)
102
102
114
123
123
131
141
159
176
188
189
190
232
235
249
269
278
316
345
357

Co-elution
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes

Column B Elution Order
Compound
Chloromethane
Vinyl chloride
Bromomethane
Chloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethylene
AcetoneCarbon Disulfide
t-1,2-Dichloroethylene
Vinyl Acetate
Methyl Ethyl Ketone
1,1,1-Trichloroethane
Dichloromethane
Carbon Tetrachloride
Benzenec-1,2-Dichloroethylene
Chloroform
Trichloroethylene
Methyl Isobutyl Ketone
1,2-Dichloropropane
1,2-Dichloroethane

ECD

Yes
Yes

Yes

293

Assay 1 User Notes

TolueneTetrachloroethylene
2-Hexanone
2-Chloroethyl Vinyl
Etherc-1,3-Dichloropropene
Bromodichloromethane
Ethylbenzene
p-Xylene
m-Xylene
t-1,3-Dichloropropene
o-Xylene
Chlorobenzene
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
Dibromochloromethane

Yes

Yes
Yes

385
389
453
500

Yes
Yes
No
Yes

525
562
650
670
688
772
875
889
1045
1265

Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No

Column C Elution Order
Compound
Chloromethane
Vinyl Chloride
Bromomethane
Chloroethane
Acetone
1,1-Dichloroethylene
Dichloromethane
Carbon disulfide
t-1,2-Dichloroethylene
Vinyl Acetate
Methyl ethyl ketone
c-1,2-Dichloroethylene
Chloroform
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1,1-Trichloroethane
BenzeneCarbon Tetrachloride
294

ECD

Yes
Yes
Yes

R.T. (S)
136
151
186
194
237
299
300
350
387
409
447
490
518
641
660
751
771

Co-elution
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Explorer Operator Manual

Creating a Custom Method
Generally, you will not need to run all 40 compounds in the Assay 1 library, youwill only be interested in a few compounds specific to your application. You can use
the information provided in this document to select your compounds and then thechromatography for your compounds.
There are two ways of creating a custom method. You can modify the library of an
existing method or you can optimize the chromatography of an existing method, bychanging the method parameters.

General Information
Modifying the library of an existing method is a matter of adding or deleting acompound, performing a calibration and storing the compounds in a custom
application file.
Changing the method parameters enables you to create a customized method
optimized for your application. However, you must first perform a few analyses todetermine the new method’s analysis and backflush times.
NOTE: Do not inject heavy compounds onto Column C. They may be retained for extended
periods of time, and may contaminate your column.
1. Set the Column A backflush time to 1500 seconds, and the analysis time to3200 seconds, then analyze your target compounds on Column A.
Column A is the precolumn for all other columns, so the retention times of thetarget compounds on Column A are used to determine the backflush timing for
all columns.
2. The backflush time for a run on Column B or C is the retention time, from
Column A, of the last peak you wish to analyze plus 0 to 50 seconds.
The backflush time for Column A is equal to the retention time of the last peakof interest plus 50 to 200 seconds, typically.

295

Assay 1 User Notes

3. Column A analysis time is equal to 2.2 times the Column A backflush time.
Because Column A is also the precolumn, it must be backflushed for at least as
long as it was foreflushed.
4. Column B and C analysis times must meet two criteria; each must be longenough to permit the last target peak to clear the column and the analysis timemust also be a minimum of 2.2 times the backflush time, for any given column.
If an analysis time is too short, for either of the above reasons, peaks may elute
during a later analysis.
NOTE: Explorer's maximum analysis time is 3200 seconds. If a peak elutes after this timeon any column, the method must be modified, increasing the temperature orpressure will speed up heavy compounds.
5. Store all target compounds in the library, and calibrate on them using the new
method.

Example - Benzene, Vinyl Chloride and Chloromethane
The following examples use three compounds that can be separated using different
methods. Our compounds of interest are benzene, vinyl chloride and chloromethane.
To simplify this example we will assume there are no known interferencecompounds.
In these examples, we will assume that the instrument we are customizing provides
the typical retention times listed in the tables below.
Solution 1 - Single Run with Analysis Time = 13 Minutes
In this example we are looking for a method to separate benzene, vinyl chloride andchloromethane in a single analysis.
The analysis time required, determined by benzene’s retention time, will be about 13
minutes. A modified method can be set up as follows:
1. Disable columns A and B.
You must do this on
Explorer.
296

Explorer Operator Manual

2. Delete unwanted compounds from the Column C library.
3. Save the custom assay under a new name.
4. Send the new assay to Explorer.
You will have the 3 target compounds in the library.
Since developing this method did not involve changing any of the criticalmethod parameters such as pressure, temperature or injection time the existing
calibration information should still result in peak identification when you run
these compounds.
5. Run an analysis and calibrate the library compounds, as discussed in
Calibration on page 215.
Solution 2 - Two Runs with Analysis Time = 8 minutes
If the 13 minute analysis time is too long, then we can optimize the method forminimum analysis time, noting that:
Benzene on Column A is well separated from the other compounds of interest.
Vinyl chloride and chloromethane are only separated on Column C, so thesecompounds must be run on Column C.
This new method will consist of two runs. The first analysis on Column A willseparate benzene from the light compounds. We will then do another run to separate
the light compounds on Column C. Benzene will be backflushed off the precolumn(Column A) to minimize the analysis time.
Benzene elutes at about 102 seconds on Column A. The backflush time will be set toapproximately 150 seconds for the first run on Column A, this allows a little extra
time to ensure the entire benzene peak has cleared the column. To set the analysis
time, multiply the backflush time by a factor of 2.2, this allows time for any
compounds eluting after benzene to be backflushed out of Column A.
The total analysis time for the first run will be 150 s x 2.2 = 330 s ~ 6 minutes.

297

Assay 1 User Notes

Vinyl chloride and chloromethane elute at about 60 seconds on Column A. The
backflush time for the second run on Column C can be set to 70 seconds, this allows
vinyl chloride and chloromethane to clear the precolumn (Column A). Benzene isstill in Column A when backflush begins. Column C elution time for chloromethane
is about 135 seconds and about 150 seconds for vinyl chloride. Analysis time on
Column C will be about 3 minutes.
This new method provides an analysis time of 9 minutes, a time saving ofapproximately 4 minutes.
NOTE: The retention time values provided here are for illustration purposes only.
You must perform runs on both Column A and C to determine the exact retention
times. These values must be determined experimentally before you can modify themethod on your instrument.
To setup your instrument with this method:
1. Using the SiteChart software, load the Assay 1 standard method.
Delete unwanted compounds from all three libraries.
2. On SiteChart’s Assay tab, select Column A and set the analysis time to 270
seconds and the backflush time to 120 seconds.
This provides 150 seconds for backflushing the precolumn.
3. On the Assay tab, select Column C and set the analysis time to 170 seconds
and the backflush time to 70 seconds.
4. Save the new method under a new .app filename, and send it to Explorer.
5. On Explorer, enable Columns A and C.
6. In SiteChart, select Column A and perform a run.
This run will give two peaks. The first peak is the vinyl chloride/chloromethane
co-elution at about 60 seconds, the other peak is benzene at 102 seconds. You
will need to calibrate benzene on Column A.

298

Explorer Operator Manual

7. In SiteChart, select Column C and perform a second run on Column C.
This run will give two peaks. The first peak is chloromethane at about 135
seconds and the second peak is vinyl chloride at about 150 seconds. You willneed to calibrate these two compounds on Column C.
8. The instrument must be calibrated to update retention time and detector
response information for the three target compounds.
9. Store the compounds in the custom method file and save the method file.

299

Assay 1 User Notes

Column Specifications
Column A
LengthInternal Diameter
Coating Thickness
Coating/Packing
Material
Column V (TVOC)
LengthInternal Diameter
Coating Thickness
Coating/Packing
Material
Column B
LengthInternal Diameter
Coating Thickness
Coating/Packing
Material
Column C
LengthInternal Diameter
Coating Thickness
Coating/Packing
Material300

4 meters (m)0.53 millimeters (mm)2 micrometers (um)35% phenyl, 65% methyl phase capillary column(SPB-35)8m
0.25 mmN/A
blank (deactivated)
20 m
0.32 mm
1.0 um
WAX phase capillary column (Supelcowax 10 )15 m
0.32 mm
12 um
100% methyl silicone phase capillary column

Explorer Operator Manual

Accurate Concentration Measurement
The following information is provided to assist you in understanding some of theanalytical issues regarding the analysis of your target compounds in ambient air.
When you are detecting compound concentrations in air samples using gas
chromatography, it is important to recognize that there are various potential sourcesof error in the measurements. These sources of error combine to give scatter inmeasured concentrations (measured as precision) and systematic bias to measured
concentrations. You must correct for these sources of error or your results will
become inaccurate.
Possible sources of error include:
Peak integration errors.
Sampling errors.
Compound dependent adsorption effects.
Detector response drift over the period of time since the last calibration.
System accuracy.
All of these effects may contribute to inaccurate measurements in any given set ofdata.

Peak Integration Errors
Baseline noise, interfering peaks or excessive tailing of the target compound peakcan cause problems in starting or stopping the peak integration at the optimum
times. These can even cause differences in integration for consecutive runs at thesame concentration. Selection of one set of integration parameters over another may
result in a nonlinear area versus concentration curve.

301

Assay 1 User Notes

It is impossible to completely eliminate integrator effects as a source of error overthe broad range of conditions under which Explorer must operate. For this reason,
it is essential that you verify the integration results generated by the instrument by
examining the chromatograms and re-integrating, if necessary. This is particularly
true if the results are being used to make decisions regarding health and safetyissues.

Sampling Errors
Sampling errors occur when the concentration of a compound in the gas sample
presented to the analytical system is not the same as the original sample.
For example: A Tedlar bag is filled with styrene and sampled at regular intervals.
A graph of measured concentration versus time produces a curve as shown in
Figure 25. This measurement sequence lasted for about 8 hours. The last run was
performed approximately 8 hours after the initial sequence of runs had been
completed. This data trend is symptomatic of adsorption of styrene by the gas bag.
1
Sampled 8hours afterend ofanalysissequence

0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0

5

10

15

20

Hours

Figure 25 Gas Bag Effect as Measured on a 1 ppm Styrene Sample
If the same concentration of styrene is measured directly from a tank of compressedgas, standard drift effects over the same time period are negligible. If a Tedlar bag isused to store a styrene sample at this concentration, then the analysis results hours
later will not accurately reflect the concentration at the time of sampling.

302

Explorer Operator Manual

In addition to container effects, there are a variety of other issues regarding sample
storage, processing and preparation that can compromise the accuracy of theconcentration measurement.

Adsorption
Another potential instrument source of error is sample adsorption by Explorer’s
analytical system. If this occurs, it will typically be seen as an increase in peakarea upon repeated sampling of the component, even after the instrument has beenin operation for many hours. The effect is usually concentration dependent, as
higher concentrations will supply the demand of a limited number of adsorption
sites without a significant percentage of sample loss.
Explorer has been designed to minimize adsorption effects by heating theanalytical system. However some compounds may still be problematic at low
concentrations.

Detector Response Drift
Detector response drift is caused by drift in the effective UV lamp intensity overtime. Although Explorer maintains a constant visible lamp intensity, it ispossible that the ionizing spectral lines, located outside the visible range, shift in
intensity over time.
Detector response drift will manifest itself as an effect that typically occurs over alonger time period than adsorption and which is not as compound specific asadsorption. Also, it is not affected by the frequency of sampling, unlike adsorption
phenomena. Calibration is recommended when the detector response has changed bygreater than 10%. This will be approximately 8 hours.
The instrument must be calibrated when Explorer is turned on and should becalibrated at 8 hour intervals thereafter. We recommend that you perform thecalibration under similar temperature and humidity conditions as that of thesample.

303

Assay 1 User Notes
1.2
1.1
1
0.9
0.8
0

100

200

300

400

500

Elapsed Time [min]Figure 26 Peak Area Stability for Repetitive Sampling for 100 ppm Isobutylene
This drift characteristic is typical of Explorer’s detector response drift,
following a 20 minute warm-up period. Although this test is performed with
isobutylene, the same approximate, peak area drift can be expected for anyof the Assay 1 compounds.
To ensure a measured concentration (at the calibration concentration) is within
10% of the actual value:
1. Calibrate once when the instrument is turned on.
Allow 30 minutes for the instrument to stabilize before performing thecalibration run(s).
2. Calibrate at 8 hour intervals.
Assuming detector response drift is similar for the Assay 1 compounds, you need tocalibrate once, immediately following instrument warm-up. Measurement of dry,
pure samples at a similar concentration to the calibration concentration should thengive a result accurate to within 10% for an 8 hour working period.
As a measuring instrument, Explorer has a non-linear response for many
compounds. Therefore, in order to make accurate measurements at concentrations
other than the calibration concentration, it is necessary to correct for instrument
non-linearity. This can only be done if a multiple point calibration is performed todetermine the response of the instrument throughout the concentration range ofinterest.
If the response curve characteristics are measured in this way, then reasonably
accurate measurements can be made.
304

Assay 2
User Notes

9

Assay 2 User Notes

An Overview of Assay 2
Assay 2 consists of 9 compounds from the petrochemical refining process.
Explorer has been configured to separate and resolve these target compounds.

The Assay 2 Disk
Two types of files are included on the assay disks. Application (or method) files
have the extension .app. These method files are loaded through the Assay tab in
SiteChart and are used to program Explorer. Assay2.app is the standard method.
It provides chromatographic settings so that all compounds can be run on a single
column.
Chromatograms from the photoionization detector are identified as .pid files.
Assay2.pid is a sample chromatogram of the compounds of interest using
Assay2.app.
Make a copy of all the files on the assay disk and use this as your working disk.
Store the original disk in a safe location.

Installation
1. Copy the files onto the PC as described in Installing your Assay Disk on page95.
2. Load the assay into Explorer as described in Loading an Assay into Explorer on
page 98.

306

Explorer Operator Manual

Compound Separation
Separation of the 9 compounds is accomplished in one run on Column B. Column A
acts as the precolumn.
The sample is injected onto Column A and any heavy compounds, present in thesample, are prevented from entering Column B by adjusting the backflush time, andonly the lighter compounds are allowed to pass from Column A to Column B.
Before the heavy compounds are able to pass into Column B, the flow is reversed,
and the heavy compounds are backflushed out of Column A.
Some separation of compounds occurs on Column A, with the majority of theseparation occurring on Column B, as shown in Figure 27.

Figure 27 Assay 2 Compounds Run on Column B

Compound Library
Assay Compounds
One compound library is installed in Explorer for Column B. The library
contains retention time and response information for each assay compound.

307

Assay 2 User Notes

The library has been determined for the Assay 2 standard method. If the method isaltered, the library is no longer valid. If the method is modified, a new library must
be created, identifying the compounds with their new retention times.
For example, if the column temperature is increased, the retention time in the
Column B library is no longer valid, since compounds will be eluting faster thanthey would in the standard method. You would have to run the compounds with the
new settings and store the compounds in the library.

Interference Compounds
Gasoline and its mixture of components is a possible interference. Gasoline is notpart of Assay 2, but may be present in your samples. Gasoline will interfere with theearly eluting peaks such as MTBE, TAME, methanol and ethanol.
Compounds lighter than the sample compounds are not separated and will elute asan early peak. The integration delay can be used to prevent this composite peak frombeing included in the peak report as shown in Figure 28.

Figure 28 Gasoline as Run on Column B
If gasoline is present, you may want to modify some chromatographic or integration
settings to ensure the best possible separation and peak identification.
NOTE: Gasoline will not be well separated on your system.

308

Explorer Operator Manual

Assay 2 Standard Method
The Assay 2 standard method, Assay2.app, has been customized for and isinstalled in your Explorer. The typical method parameters for Assay 2 are listed
below as are the library compounds for each column and typical retention times
and detectable concentration ranges for this method. These values will vary on
your instrument.
NOTE: For maximum accuracy at low concentrations, we recommend that you verify
Explorer’s integration, and reintegrate manually, if necessary.
Concentrations outside these specified ranges, especially at the lower end, can beobtained by adjusting the injection time, PID state and integration parameters.
Settings for Assay 2
Column B
MethodCarrier Gas

Air

Detector

PID

Analysis Time (S)1300

Oven Temperature ( C)60

Pressure (psi)12

PID State

Low Sensitivity

Injection Method
Inject Method

Loop Injection

Inject Time (S)5Pump Time (S)20

Backflush Time (S)

300

309

Assay 2 User Notes

Integration Method
Automatic Integration

Disabled

Slope Up (mV/S)

1

Slope Down (mV/S)

1

Min. Height (mV)

0.0Min. Area (mV S)

0.0

Filter Level

3

Integration Delay (S)60

Elution Order for Standard Method

Column B
Methyl t-butyl ether (MTBE)
t-Amyl methyl ether (TAME)
Methanol
Ethanol
BenzeneTolueneEthylbenzene
m-Xyleneo-Xylene

R.T. (S)Concentration
Range (ppm)

Co-elution

78
117
155
187
226
408
708
763
998

1 - 100
1 - 100
50 - 500
100 - 1000
0.03 - 100
0.5 - 200
1 - 150
1 - 150
1 - 150

No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

NOTE: The information is for reference only. Retention times may vary significantly.

310

Explorer Operator Manual

Creating a Custom Method
You may not need to run all 9 compounds in the Assay 2 library, you may only beinterested in a few compounds specific to your application. You can use theinformation provided in this document to select your compounds and then optimize
the chromatography for your compounds.
There are two ways of creating a custom method. You can modify the library of an
existing method. Alternatively, you can optimize the chromatography of an existing
method, by changing the method parameters.

General Information
Modifying the library of an existing method is a matter of adding or deleting acompound, performing a calibration and storing the compounds in a custom
application file.
Changing the method parameters enables you to create a customized method
optimized for your application. However, you must first perform a few analyses todetermine the new method’s analysis and backflush times.
NOTE: Do not inject heavy compounds onto Column C. They may be retained for extended
periods of time, and may contaminate your column.
3. Set the Column A backflush time to 1500 seconds, and the analysis time to3200 seconds, then analyze your target compounds on Column A.
Column A is the precolumn for all other columns, so the retention times of thetarget compounds on Column A are used to determine the backflush timing for
all columns.
4. The backflush time for a run on Column B or C is the retention time, from
Column A, of the last peak you wish to analyze plus 0 to 50 seconds.
The backflush time for Column A is equal to the retention time of the last peakof interest plus 50 to 200 seconds, typically.

311

Assay 2 User Notes

5. Column A analysis time is equal to 2.2 times the Column A backflush time.
Because Column A is also the precolumn, it must be backflushed for at least as
long as it was foreflushed.
6. Column B and C analysis times must meet two criteria; each must be longenough to permit the last target peak to clear the column and the analysis timemust also be a minimum of 2.2 times the backflush time, for any given column.
If an analysis time is too short, for either of the above reasons, peaks may elute
during a later analysis.
NOTE: Explorer's maximum analysis time is 3200 seconds. If a peak elutes after this timeon any column, the method must be modified, increasing the temperature orpressure will speed up heavy compounds.
7. Store all target compounds in the library, and calibrate on them using the new
method.

Example - Benzene and Toluene
If we are only interested in benzene at a concentration of approximately 0.5 ppm andtoluene at 0.5 ppm, we can customize the method provided.
To customize this method you will need to perform a run on Column B to determine
the exact elution time for each compound. You will then use this time to determine
the analysis and backflush times.
NOTE: To simplify this example we will assume there are no known interferencecompounds.
Assuming an instrument with elution information as given previously, we will
modify the method as follows:
1. Using SiteChart, load the Assay 2 standard method.
Delete unwanted compounds from the library.
2. Disable Column B.

312

Explorer Operator Manual

3. Ensure Explorer is setup and ready to run an analysis.
The instrument must be connected to carrier gas, and the instrument status mustshow Ready.
4. Perform a few runs of your sample on Column A.
One peak should appear, this is the benzene/toluene co-elution at 150 seconds.
The peak must completely clear the column to ensure accurate quantitation.
This includes any peak tailing.
5. The backflush time must be set so that the compounds of interest clear Column
A before backflush begins.
You will use the retention time of the latest eluting peak to set the backflush
time. You cannot begin backflush until the benzene/toluene peak clears
Column A, so allow an additional 20 seconds. In this case the backflush timeshould be set to approximately 170 seconds.
6. To set the analysis time use the retention time of the latest eluting peak andmultiply it by 1.1.
You will not know the exact time until you perform an analysis on Column B,
but should set the analysis time to at least 800 seconds to allow all peaks ofinterest to elute.
7. Send the new method to Explorer and perform a run of your sample.
Two peaks should appear. The first peak will be the benzene. The next peak
will be toluene at approximately 410 seconds. The analysis time should be set
to the retention time of the last eluting peak multiplied by 1.1. In this example
450 seconds.
8. Perform a few more runs to ensure your timing is correct.
9. Remove all unwanted compounds from the Column B library.
10. Analysis and backflush time are critical method parameters. The existing
library information will become invalid. You must perform a run and store thecompounds in the library. If possible store each compound at more than one
concentration to obtain a more accurate calibration curve.
11. Perform a run and calibrate benzene and toluene in the Column B library.
313

Assay 2 User Notes

12. Save the new method under a new name.
In addition to adjusting the analysis time and the backflush time, you may also want
to increase the pressure and the temperature. This will decrease the analysis time
significantly. You must ensure there are no interfering compounds that may co-elutewith your compounds of interest and that your compounds of interest are well
separated.

314

Explorer Operator Manual

Column Specifications
Column A
Length

2.5 meters (m)Internal Diameter

0.53 millimeters (mm)Coating Thickness

2 micrometers (um)Coating/Packing
Material

35% phenyl, 65% methyl phase capillary column(SPB-35)

Column V (TVOC)
Length8m

Internal Diameter

0.25 mm

Coating Thickness

N/A

Coating/Packing
Material

blank (deactivated)

Column B
Length20 m

Internal Diameter

0.32 mm

Coating Thickness

1.5 umCoating/Packing
Material

WAX phase capillary column (Supelcowax 10 )Column C
Length4’ x 1/16”

Internal Diameter

0.040”

Coating Thickness

N/A

Coating/Packing
Material

1% SP-1000 on 60/80 Carbopack

B (SPB-1)

315

Assay 2 User Notes

Accurate Concentration Measurement
The following information is provided to assist you in understanding some of theanalytical issues regarding the analysis of petrochemical refinery target compounds
in ambient air.
When you are detecting compound concentrations in air samples using gas
chromatography, it is important to recognize that there are various potential sourcesof error in the measurements. These sources of error combine to give scatter inmeasured concentrations (measured as precision) and systematic bias to measured
concentrations. You must correct for these sources of error or your results will
become inaccurate.
Possible sources of error include:
Peak integration errors.
Sampling errors.
Compound dependent adsorption effects.
Detector response drift over the period of time since the last calibration.
System accuracy.
All of these effects may contribute to inaccurate measurements in any given set ofdata.

Peak Integration Errors
Baseline noise, interfering peaks or excessive tailing of the target compound peakcan cause problems in starting or stopping the peak integration at the optimum
times. These can even cause differences in integration for consecutive runs at thesame concentration. Selection of one set of integration parameters over another may
result in a nonlinear area versus concentration curve.

316

Explorer Operator Manual

It is impossible to completely eliminate integrator effects as a source of error overthe broad range of conditions under which Explorer must operate. For this reason,
it is essential that you verify the integration results generated by the instrument by
examining the chromatograms and re-integrating, if necessary. This is particularly
true if the results are being used to make decisions regarding health and safetyissues.

Sampling Errors
Sampling errors occur when the concentration of a compound in the gas sample
presented to the analytical system is not the same as the original sample.
For example: A Tedlar bag is filled with styrene and sampled at regular intervals.
A graph of measured concentration versus time produces a curve as shown in
Figure 29. This measurement sequence lasted for about 8 hours. The last run was
performed approximately 8 hours after the initial sequence of runs had been
completed. This data trend is symptomatic of adsorption of styrene by the gas bag.
If the same concentration of styrene is measured directly from a tank of compressedgas, standard drift effects over the same time period are negligible. If a Tedlar bag isused to store a styrene sample at this concentration, then the analysis results hours
later will not accurately reflect the concentration at the time of sampling.
1
Sampled 8hours afterend ofanalysissequence

0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0

5

10

15

20

Hours

Figure 29 Gas Bag Effect as Measured on a 1 ppm Styrene Sample

317

Assay 2 User Notes

In addition to container effects, there are a variety of other issues regarding sample
storage, processing and preparation which can compromise the accuracy of theconcentration measurement.

Adsorption
Another potential instrument source of error is sample adsorption by Explorer's
analytical system. If this occurs, it will typically be seen as an increase in peakarea upon repeated sampling of the component, even after the instrument has beenin operation for many hours. The effect is usually concentration dependent, as
higher concentrations will supply the demand of a limited number of adsorption
sites without a significant percentage of sample loss.
Explorer has been designed to minimize adsorption effects by heating theanalytical system. However some compounds may still be problematic at low
concentrations. Each compound has been tested for adsorption effects and theresults are illustrated below. These results were used to generate the precision
specifications for Assay 2 compounds.
The instruments being tested had not previously been exposed to the target
compound. The analyses were performed with typical Assay 2 method parameters.
A bag sample is prepared containing all the Assay 2 target compounds at theindicated concentrations.
The adsorption test itself consists of repetitive sampling (10 runs) and analysis of theindicated compound concentration. The sample is typically obtained either directlyfrom a tank standard or by diluting a tank standard with air to obtain the indicatedconcentration. The instrument was calibrated and then the 10 runs were performed.
Most of the Assay 2 compounds are stable in a gas bag at the indicatedconcentrations. However, the methanol peak area and height were observed todecrease over time during this test indicating that the methanol was not stable at thetarget concentration in the bag and that therefore this approach to quantitating the
instrument adsorption effects for methanol would not produce accurate results. The
methanol results reported in Figure 31 were generated by sampling a gas stream of
96 ppm methanol produced by dilution from a tank standard.

318

Explorer Operator Manual

Test results below, are shown for the Assay 2 compounds as run on one
instrument. These results are typical for Explorer.
1.2
1.1
MTBE 5 ppm

1.0

TAME 5 ppm

0.9
0.8
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

Run No.

Figure 30 Peak Area Stability for Repetitive Sampling of 5 ppm MTBE and5 ppm TAME

1.3
1.2
1.1

Methanol 96 ppm

1.0

Ethanol 20 ppm

0.9
0.8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Run No.

Figure 31 Peak Area Stability for Repetitive Sampling of 20 ppm Ethanol and
96 ppm Methanol

319

Assay 2 User Notes

1.1
Toluene 10 ppm

1.1

Benzene 2.5 ppm

1.0

Ethylbenzene 10
ppm

1.0
0.9
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

Run No.

Figure 32 Peak Area Stability for Repetitive Sampling of 10 ppm Toluene,
2.5 ppm Benzene and 10 ppm Ethylbenzene

1.1
1.1o-Xylene 10 ppm

1.0m-Xylene 10 ppm

1.0
0.9
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

Run No.

Figure 33 Peak Area Stability for Repetitive Sampling of 10 ppm m-Xylene and10 ppm o-Xylene

Response Drift
Detector response drift is caused by drift in the effective UV lamp intensity overtime. Although Explorer maintains a constant visible lamp intensity, it ispossible that the ionizing spectral lines, located outside the visible range, shift in
intensity over time.

320

Explorer Operator Manual

Detector response drift will manifest itself as an effect that typically occurs over alonger time period than adsorption and which is not as compound specific asadsorption. Also, it is not affected by the frequency of sampling, unlike adsorption
phenomena. Calibration is recommended when the detector response has changed bygreater than 10%.
The table below provides a recommended maximum operating time before
calibration is necessary. The instrument must be calibrated when Explorer isturned on and should be calibrated at the indicated interval thereafter. We
recommend that you perform the calibration under similar temperature andhumidity conditions as that of the sample.
The calibration information in the table, and the discussion which follows, areapplicable only for measurement of dry, pure, sample gases containing the target
compounds at approximately calibration concentrations.
Calibration
TLV
Precision
Interval**(Hrs)(ppm) % RSD from Mean *MTBE
10
0.5@5ppm
8
TAME
0.5
1.6@5ppm
8
Ethanol
0.5
1.2@20ppm
8
Benzene10
0.5@2.5ppm
8
Toluene50
0.8@10ppm
8
Methanol200
5.0@96ppm
8Ethylbenzene
750
0.5@10ppm
8m-Xylene
200
0.5@10ppm
8o-Xylene
100
0.5@10ppm
8* Based on five consecutive samples** Interval between calibrations for <10% change in accuracy
assuming Explorer is calibrated once immediately after a 20 minute
warm up period.
CompoundTable 1 Precision and Calibration Data for Assay 2 Compounds

321Assay 2 User Notes

These calibration times are based on an extended measurement of peakarea drift of a generic compound (isobutylene) following instrument warmup. A Explorer which has been off for an extended period is turned on andset to auto sample and analyze isobutylene on Column B. Isobutylene is avolatile compound. The observed peak area drift is an indication of detector
drift only. The resulting area drift over a period of 400 minutes is shown in
Figure 34. The change in peak area over this time period was 5%.

This drift characteristic is typical of Explorer's detector response drift, following a 20
minute warm-up period. Although this test is performed with isobutylene. the same
approximate, peak area drift can be expected for any of the Assay 2 compounds. To
ensure a measured concentration (at the calibration concentration) is within 10% of
the actual value:
1. Calibrate once when the instrument is turned on.
Allow 30 minutes for the instrument to stabilize before performing thecalibration run(s).
2. Calibrate at 8 hour intervals.
Assuming detector response drift is similar for the petrochemical compounds, youneed to calibrate once, immediately following instrument warm-up. Measurement ofdry, pure samples at a similar concentration to the calibration concentration should
then give a result accurate to within 10% for an 8 hour working period.
1.2
1.1
1
0.9
0.8
0

100 200 300 400 500
Elapsed Time [min]Figure 34 Peak Area Stability for Repetitive Sampling for 100 ppm Isobutylene
322Explorer Operator Manual

The numbers in the table are meant as a guideline. It is possible the instrument may
drift more or less rapidly in practice. This will depend on your application andoperating conditions. You may need to calibrate more frequently to ensure reliable
results.
As a measuring instrument, Explorer has a non-linear response for many
compounds. Therefore, in order to make accurate measurements at concentrations
other than the calibration concentration it is necessary to correct for instrument
non-linearity.
This can only be done if a multiple point calibration is performed to determine theresponse of the instrument throughout the concentration range of interest.
If the response curve characteristics are measured in this way, then reasonably
accurate measurements can be made.

323

Appendices14

AppendicesTechnical Description
Explorer uses gas chromatography to separate and detect volatileorganic compounds (VOCs) present in an air sample.
In a gas chromatograph (GC), the sample is carried from the point of introduction,
through a separating column, and then out through a detector, by a continuous
stream of relatively inert gas called carrier gas. The column in a GC is a long tube
with sticky or sorptive material coating the inside walls or packed into the tube. The
sample components become separated from one another as they are carried throughthe column because of differences in their rates of interaction with the sorptive
material. Each different sample component is therefore retained for a different
length of time within the column, and elutes from the column into the detector at acharacteristic retention time.
The detector responds as each component flows through the detector cell. If thedetector response is displayed against the elapsed time, then a series of peaks
separated in time is seen, one peak for each sample component. The retention timeof the tip of each peak indicates what the sample component is, and the area of thepeak indicates how much is present.
Chromatography is a comparative technique of analysis. The identities andconcentrations reported by Explorer after a sample is analyzed are based on theretention times and peak sizes of previously analyzed standards. When an assay
is set up in Explorer, a standard of each compound of interest is stored in
Explorer's memory by retention time, peak area, and concentration. The ratio of
peak area to concentration is the sensitivity (the response to concentration ratio,
measured in mVS/ppm) for the compound. This information is saved in a part of
Explorer's memory called the library, and is automatically updated during acalibration.
In each sample analysis, peak retention times are compared to retention times oflibrary compounds. If they match (within the limits of the peak recognition
window), then the peak is identified as the corresponding library compound. To
calculate the concentration of the identified peak, its area is divided by thelibrary sensitivity for the compound.

325

Explorer Operator Manual

Library retention times and sensitivities are updated whenever Explorer iscalibrated. Explorer also calculates the new retention time to old retention time ratio
for each library compound in the calibration gas. If a library compound is notpresent in the calibration gas, Explorer updates its retention time by multiplying it byan average calculated from compounds in the calibration gas.

Sample Introduction
Samples can be introduced into a GC either automatically or manually.
Explorer accepts air and gas samples both ways.
If you have a large volume of sample available, as is usually the case in ambient air
sampling, then automatic sample injection is the easiest means of introduction. Thisis done using Explorer's internal sampling pump and sample loop. When the sample
pump is on, the sample is drawn in through Explorer's sample in port, then througha fixed volume called a sample loop, then through the pump to be vented throughthe pump out port. The sample loop has gas switching valves at either end of it.
Once the sample loop is full of sample gas, the pump stops and these valves switch
to connect one end of the loop to the carrier gas supply and the other end of theloop to the beginning or head of the GC column. Carrier gas then sweeps the sample
from the loop onto the column for analysis. Once the sample has been injected, thecarrier gas flow is again switched, this time to bypass the loop and continue to feed
the column.
Although the sample loop volume is fixed in Explorer, it is possible to inject only apart of the loop volume. This is done by switching the carrier gas to bypass theloop before the entire loop volume has been swept onto the column.
To use automatic sample loop injection, you must have sufficient sample atatmospheric pressure available for the sample pump to draw through the sample
loop and connecting tubing. If you have a only a limited amount of sample available,
such as headspace in a vial above a soil or water sample, then manual sample
injection is required. This is done using a gas tight syringe and Explorer's injection
port.

326

Appendices

The injection port is located in the carrier gas stream just before the head of thecolumn, and contains a septum, which is a silicone disc coated with Teflon. The
sample is collected in the gas tight syringe, then the syringe needle is pushed
through the septum. The syringe plunger is depressed to inject the gas sample into
the carrier gas stream and onto the head of the column for analysis, and finally theneedle is withdrawn.

Precolumn Backflushing
The analysis in a GC is complete once all the sample components have been carried
the length of the column and have flowed through the detector. The analysis time istherefore determined by the retention time of the most-retained sample component.
If a second sample is introduced onto the GC column before the first analysis iscompleted, it is possible for little-retained components in the second sample to flow
through the detector at the same time as more-retained components in the firstsample. This leads to difficulty in interpreting the detector output signal.
To avoid this, a technique known as precolumn backflushing is used in Explorer.
Here, two GC columns, a shorter precolumn and a longer analytical column, arejoined in series with a tee between them. Initially the branch of the tee is closed toflow and carrier gas is directed along the precolumn, through the run of the tee, andthen through the analytical column to the detector. The sample is introduced onto
the head of the precolumn and carried along the precolumn towards the analyticalcolumn. After an interval of time the carrier gas is switched and introduced at thebranch of the tee between the two columns. Those sample components which havealready passed the tee continue to be carried towards the detector along theanalytical column. Those which are still in the precolumn are flushed backwards
along the precolumn and vented from the head of the precolumn.
Backflushing of the precolumn to clean it for the next sample occurs while theanalysis continues on the analytical column. Once all components have eluted fromboth columns, the carrier gas can be switched back to flow through both columns inseries in preparation for the next sample.

327

Explorer Operator Manual

Precolumn backflushing reduces total analysis time in Explorer. It is not necessary
to wait for the longer retained components that are not required, to pass throughthe analytical column. Precolumn backflushing also increases analyticalconfidence by reducing the possibility of peaks from an earlier analysis eluting
during a later analysis.

Column Selection
In a GC, the types of sample components which can be separated from one anotherare dictated by the type of GC column used. Some column types are suited to lightgases, others to heavier vapors, and yet others to polar vapors. For flexibility in thetypes of compounds which can be analyzed in a GC, it is necessary to have several
different types of columns installed so that the optimum column can be selected forthe particular analysis. This is typically done by having you, the GC user, remove
and replace columns within the GC instrument.
In Explorer, four columns are installed and kept ready for use. Refer to the user notes
supplied with your assay for detailed specifications of the columns installed in yourinstrument and how to use the columns for your application.
In TVOC mode, no gas chromatography is performed on the sample. Instead, thesample is introduced into a stream of carrier gas and carried directly to the detector.
All separating columns are bypassed. The detector response is a single peak which
represents the composite of all detectable compounds in the sample.

Photoionization Detector
The photoionization detector (PID) consists of a detector cell through which thecolumn effluent flows, and a lamp that directs ultraviolet (UV) light into the cell.
In Explorer, the lamp is an electrodeless discharge tube, and is made to light using
a high-frequency (HF) driver circuit.
The lamp contains low pressure gas into which the high frequency energy is coupledthrough an antenna wrapped around the lampholder. The HF driver circuit iscontrolled by Explorer's microprocessor based on a feedback signal from a lightsensor on the HF driver circuit board.

328

AppendicesDissipation of the HF energy in the gas inside the lamp causes the gas to glow with abright blue-violet light. UV light with a wavelength of 120 nanometers (nm) is also
produced. UV light of this wavelength carries 10.6 electron volts (eV) of energy.
The UV light is emitted from the lamp and is directed at the stream of carrier gas
eluting from the column. When light of this energy hits the eluting molecules, they
may become ionized; that is, electrons may be knocked off the molecules.
Many of the chemicals considered pollutants, including most hydrocarbons, areionized. The permanent air gases (argon, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, oxygen, water
vapor etc.) require a relatively high energy for ionization, and are not ionized by the10.6 eV UV lamp.
Whether or not a certain molecule is ionized depends upon its Ionization Potential(IP). If the IP of a molecule is less than the energy of the light, 10.6 eV, it will most
likely be ionized. If the IP is greater than 10.6 eV, it is not readily ionized. Most of
the permanent air gases including nitrogen and water vapor have IPs over 12 eV.
This means that the carrier gas and the sample matrix are not ionized.
A continuous electric field is maintained between a repeller electrode and a collector
electrode in the PID cell. Once they have been ionized by the lamp, the ionizedmolecules in the PID cell move in the electric field, generating a current which is
proportional to the concentration of the ionized molecules in the detector cell. An
electrometer circuit converts the current to a voltage, which is then further
converted to a digital signal and fed to Explorer's microprocessor.

329

Explorer Operator Manual

CO

Figure 67 Photoionization Detector

Analytical Engine
The GC functions, sample loop injection, syringe injection, precolumn backflushing,column selection, TVOC operation, and detection require a sophisticated circuit ofgas flow switching valves. All the parts of this circuit of valves and interconnections
that contact the sample should be chemically inert to preserve the quality of theanalysis and to reduce sample degradation. They should all be maintained atelevated temperature to avoid any condensation of sample components.
Interconnecting volumes should be kept small to minimize any peak broadening.

330

Appendices

In Explorer, these GC design requirements have been met by fabricating an arrayof 21 inert, low-volume gas switching valves, with interconnections, in aninternally-heated monolithic assembly. The other GC components (injection port,
precolumn, analytical columns, and detector) are mounted and thermally linked tothis valve array, to create a compact analytical engine.

Electron Capture Detector
The electron capture detector (ECD) is sensitive to chemical compounds called
electrophilic compounds, which attract free electrons. The ECD is especiallysensitive to hydrocarbons which contain atoms of chlorine or bromine.
In the ECD cell there is an electron source which generates electrons at a constantrate, and a collector electrode for collecting electrons. When an electrophiliccompound passes through the ECD, it captures some of the generated electrons, andcauses the rate of collection at the collector electrode to fall. This decrease inelectron current is the detector response.
The ECD cell contains a cylinder of nickel foil through which the carrier gas flows.
Coated on the foil’s inner surface is a quantity of the radioactive isotope nickel-63
which emits electrons at the rate of about 500 million per second.
Electrons emitted from the nickel-63 collide with and ionize the carrier gas, creating
more electrons. The resultant ions and electrons travel to the collector electrode
under the influence of a pulsed voltage applied between the nickel-63 electron
source and the collector electrode. This flow of ions and electrons is the cellbackground current. The pulse frequency is varied to maintain a constant averagebackground current. An electrophilic compound in the detector decreases the cell
current as the compound captures electrons and forms ions, which travel more
slowly than electrons. The pulse frequency of the polarizing supply is automaticallyraised to maintain a constant current in the cell. This frequency is the detector
output signal and is fed to Explorer’s microprocessor.
You must use nitrogen carrier gas as the oxygen in air will absorb electrons andreduce the sensitivity of the ECD.

331

Explorer Operator Manual

In Explorer the column effluent is split between the PID and the ECD. Make-up gas
is supplied to the ECD in order to maintain a constant flow rate over the detector
and to ensure stability. The low flows normally put though a capillary column may
reduce the baseline. The makeup gas is added to the column effluent before it enters
the detector to maintain the flow through the ECD at a level that will ensure a stablesignal level.

332

Appendices

The AC Adapter Line Cord
In most cases Explorer will be shipped with an AC line cord that will fit the ACwall outlet in your area. If this cannot be done, you may need to obtain an AC line
cord suitable for the AC receptacle in your area.
The AC line cord, attached plug and receptacle must be marked with your country's
certification mark and the cord must have a Harmonization (HAR) Mark.
The line cord must be rated for either 100 to 120 VAC at 60 Hz or 220 to 240 VAC
at 50 Hz. The voltage rating will depend on the voltage in your area.

333

Explorer Operator Manual

Calibration Gas
It is recommended that commercially analyzed calibration gas andassociated regulators be used with Explorer.
The compounds and the concentration of the calibration gas will depend on yourapplication. When ordering calibration gas, specify each compound andconcentration. Specify 5% blend tolerance, and 2% analytical tolerance.
Standards must be made up in hydrocarbon free air. Balance air should not havemore than 0.1 ppm total hydrocarbons (THC). If your standards are unstable in air or
if you are using nitrogen as carrier gas you may obtain your calibration standards
made up in nitrogen. Balance nitrogen should not have more than 0.1 ppm totalhydrocarbons (THC).
When selecting calibration gas, keep in mind the upper and lower limits of the assay.
Try to obtain each compound at a concentration that is close to the your value ofinterest.
Obtain a calibration gas regulator, with 1/4” compression fitting outlet. Use only the
specified regulator for your calibration gas. Confirm regulator type and material
with your specialty gas supplier.

334

Explorer Operator Manual

SiteChart Customer License Agreement
INFICON licenses the program furnished herewith to customers for their use
only on the terms and conditions set forth below. Opening the diskette package
indicates your acceptance of these terms and conditions.
1 .................................................................................................... Definitions
1.1 “Licensed Program” shall mean any Object Code supplied by
LICENSOR under the License.
1.2 “Use” shall mean the copying of any portion of the Licensed Programfrom a storage unit or media into a machine for processing of themachine instructions or statements contained in such material.
2 ............................................................................................... License Grant
2.1 LICENSEE is granted a non-transferable, non-exclusive right to Use theLicensed Program supplied by or is granted a non-transferable, nonexclusive right to Use the Licensed Program supplied by LICENSOR.
LICENSEE may make copies of the Licensed Program as necessary forarchive, testing or backup purposes only.
3 ...............................................................................................................Term
3.1 This LICENSE shall be effective from the date of receipt of theLicensed Program until it is terminated in accordance with Article 7.0
4 ..............................................................Proprietary Rights and Protection
4.1 LICENSEE acknowledges and understands that nothing contained inthis license shall be construed as conveying title in Licensed Program to
the LICENSEE.
4.2 LICENSEE agrees to hold the Licensed Program in confidence andshall not disclose the Licensed Program or part thereof without the priorwritten approval of LICENSOR except to its employees to whom
disclosure is necessary for Use. LICENSEE agrees not to disassemble,
decompile, or cross-compile Licensed Program.

335

Appendices4.3 Where any of LICENSOR’s rights to the Licensed Program, or part
thereof, arise under an agreement with a third party supplier, suchsupplier shall have the benefit of LICENSOR’S rights hereunder.
4.4 LICENSEE acknowledges that the Licensed Program may containencryptions, or other devices that may prevent or detect unauthorized
use of the licensed program. Temporary use on backup equipment may
require assistance from LICENSOR.
5 ..................................................................................... Notices and Legends
5.1 LICENSEE agrees to reproduce and include any copyright notices,trademarks, or other legends or credits included in the Licensed
Program, or requested in writing by LICENSOR, in and on every copy
made by LICENSEE of Licensed Program, or part thereof. The
existence of any copyright notice shall not be construed as an admission
or presumption of publication of the Licensed Program.
6 ...................................................................................................... Warranty
6.1 LICENSOR warrants that for ninety (90) days from the date theLicensed Program is received, the Licensed Program supplied by
LICENSOR shall perform in accordance with the standards set forth in
the software manual related to the Licensed Program, if any, provided
that the Software Registration Form has been returned to the
LICENSOR.
6.2 The above warranty does not extend and shall not apply to Licensed
Program to the extent that any breach of warranty is caused by thelicensed program being: (a) not Used in accordance with the software
manual supplied hereunder; (b) Used in combination with any program
material not licensed herein; (c) modified by LICENSEE; or (d) Used
with equipment other than the designated equipment

336

Explorer Operator Manual

6.3 LICENSOR MAKES NO WARRANTIES THAT ERRORS HAVEBEEN COMPLETELY ELIMINATED FROM THE LICENSEDPROGRAM OR THAT USE OF ANY LICENSED PROGRAM WILLNOT INFRINGE UPON ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT, OR
TRADEMARK. LICENSOR MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE LICENSEDPROGRAM. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE
SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND LICENSEE MAY ALSO HAVEOTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
7 ...................................................................................................Termination
7.1 If LICENSEE fails to comply with any term or condition of the license,
LICENSOR may notify LICENSEE in writing of such failure. If
LICENSEE fails to cure such failure within thirty (30) days of such
written notice, this License may be terminated.
7.2 LICENSEE may terminate the License at will on thirty (30) days priorwritten notice to LICENSOR. Within ten (10) days after termination,
LICENSEE shall certify in writing to LICENSOR that all copies, inwhole or in part, in any form, of the Licensed Program have been
destroyed or returned to LICENSOR.
7.3 LICENSOR shall have the right to terminate this License if
LICENSEE’S normal business operations are disrupted for more than
thirty (30) days, by reason of insolvency, bankruptcy, or receivership.
8 .................................................................................. Limitation of Liability
8.1 The total liability of LICENSOR or its suppliers for any claim or
damage arising out of use of Licensed Program or in connection withany breach of this License shall be limited to direct damages and shallnot exceed the License fees which have been paid by LICENSEE toLICENSOR for use of the Licensed Program which is the subject ofsuch claim or damage.

337

Appendices8.2 In no event shall LICENSOR or its suppliers be responsible for any
special, indirect, punitive or consequential damages arising out of theuse of any Licensed Program or in connection with any breach of thislicense, even if LICENSOR is advised in advance of the possibility OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
9 ................................................................................................ Miscellaneous
9.1 Limitation of ActionNo action arising out of this License, regardlessof form, may be brought by either party against the other more than two(2) years after the cause of action has accrued.
9.2 EnforceabilityShould any provision of this License be held by a courtof law or equity to be illegal, invalid, or unenforceable, the remaining
provisions of the License shall not be affected or impaired thereby.
9.3 WaiverThe failure of any party to enforce any term or condition ofthis license shall not constitute a waiver of that party’s right to enforce
any term or condition of this License unless waived in writing.
9.4 Governing LawThis license shall be interpreted and governed by thelaw of the State of Connecticut.
9.5 NoticesAll notices shall be in writing and sent by registered orcertified mail, return receipt requested. The date notice is received shallbe the effective date.

338

Explorer Operator Manual

Contacting INFICON

339

Appendices

Instrument Specifications
Dimensions:
Weight:Detectors:
Keyboard:
Display
Battery Pack Type:
Charge/Discharge Time:Power Requirements:
System Memory:
Serial Output:
Alarm Output:
Inlet Connection:
Inlet Filter:
Materials in Sample Stream:
Chromatography:

Operating Temperature Range:
Operating Humidity Range:

34015.4” (39 cm) long, 10.6” (27 cm) wide, 5.9”
(15 cm) high15 lbs (6.8 kg)
Photoionization, with standard 10.6 eV HFexcited electrodeless discharge tube.
8 push buttons. 4 fixed function and 4 soft
keys
Backlit, liquid crystal, 128 x 64 graphic array
Nickel-metal hydride sealed cell
6 hr/15 hr
Single 10 V to 18 V DC source, 3 A
maximum. AC adapter supplied
256k internal RAM, 175k for datalogging
RS-232, 9600 baudInternal audio, 85 dB, Alarm LED
1/4” stainless steel compression fitting
Replaceable Teflon/Polypropylene, 1 um
Stainless steel, Teflon backed septum forsyringe injection
Auto-inject precolumn backflush, withminiature, inert, switching valves andisothermal widebore capillary columns.
Packed 1/16” columns are used for some
applications.
5 C to 40 C (41 F to 105 F)
0 to 95% (non-condensing)Explorer Operator Manual

Title 10, Chapter 1 CFR - Energy
NOTE: Users of the information in this section are advised that it is provided for theconvenience of reference only and as such has no official sanction. The original
regulations and amendments thereto should be consulted for all purposes ofinterpreting and applying the law.

Sections 20.2201 and 20.2202§20.2201

Reports of Theft or Loss of Licensed Material(a) Telephone Reports(1)

Each licensee shall report by telephone as follows:(i)

Immediately after its occurrence becomes known to thelicensee, any lost, stolen, or missing licensed material in an
aggregate quantity equal to or greater than 1000 the quantity
specified in appendix C to part 20 under such circumstancesthat it appears to the licensee that an exposure could result inunrestricted areas; or(ii)

Within 30 days after the occurrence of any lost, stolen, or
missing licensed material becomes known to the licensee, alllicensed material in a quantity greater than 1000 the quantity
specified in appendix C to part 20 that is still missing at thistime.

(2) Reports must be made as follows:(i) Licensees having an installed Emergency Notification Systemshall make the reports to the NRC Operations Center inaccordance with §60.72 of this chapter, and(ii)

All other licensees shall make reports by telephone to the NRC
Operations Center (301-961-0550).

341

Appendices(b)

Written Reports(1) Each licensee required to make a report under paragraph (a) of thissection shall, within 30 days after making the telephone report,make a written report setting forth the following information:(i)

A description of the licensed material involved, including kind,
quantity and chemical and physical form; and(ii)

A description of the circumstances under which the loss or theftoccurred; and(iii) A statement of disposition or probable disposition of thelicensed material involved; and(iv) Exposures of individuals to radiation, circumstances underwhich the exposure occurred, and the possible total effective
dose equivalent to persons in unrestricted areas; and(v)

Actions that have been taken, or will be taken, to recover thematerial; and(vi) Procedures or measures that have been or will be adopted toensure against a recurrence of the loss or theft of licensed
material.
(2)342

Reports must be made as follows:(i)

For holders of an operating license for a nuclear power plant,
the events included in paragraph (b) of this section must bereported in accordance with the procedures described in §50.73(b), (c), (d), (e) and (g) of this chapter and must include theinformation required in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, and(ii)

All other licensees shall make reports to the Administrator of
the appropriate NRC Regional Office listed in appendix D topart 20.

Explorer Operator Manual(c)

A duplicate report is not required under paragraph (b) of this section if
the licensee is also required to submit a report pursuant to §§30.55(c),40.64(o), 50.72, 50.73, 70.52, 73.27(b), 73.67(e)(3)(vi), 73.67(g)(3)(iii),
79.71, or §150.19(c) of this chapter.

(d)

Subsequent to filing the written report the licensee shall also report any
additional substantive information on the loss or theft within 30 days
after the licensee learns of such information.

(e) The licensee shall prepare any report filed with the Commission
pursuant to this section so that names of individuals who have received
exposure to radiation are stated in a separate and detachable part of thereport.
[66 FR 23406, May 31, 1991, as amended at 58 FR 69220, Dec. 30, 1993; 60 FR 20186, Apr. 25, 1996]§20.2202

Notification of Incidents(a) Immediate Notification. Notwithstanding any other requirements for
notification, each licensee shall immediately report any event involving
byproduct, source or special nuclear material possessed by the licensee
that may have caused or threatens to cause any of the following
conditions(1)

An individual to receive(i)

A total effective dose equivalent of 25 rems (0.25 Sv) or more;
or

(ii)

An eye dose equivalent of 75 rems (0.75 Sv) or more; or(iii) A shallow dose equivalent to the skin or extremities of 250 rads

(2.5 Gy) or more; or(2)

The release of radioactive material. Inside or outside of a restricted
area, so that had an individual been present for 24 hours, theindividual could have received an intake five times the annual limit
on intake (the provisions of this paragraph do not apply to locations

343

Appendiceswhere personnel are not normally stationed during routine
operations, such as hot-cells or process enclosures.).
(b)

Twenty-four hour notification. Each licensee shall, within 24 hours ofthe discovery of the event, report any event involving loss of control oflicensed material possessed by the licensee that may have caused or
threatens to cause any of the following conditions:(1)

An individual to receive, in a period of 24 hours
(i)A total effective dose equivalent of 6 rems (0.05 Sv) or more; or(ii)

An eye dose equivalent exceeding 15 rems (0.15 Sv) or more;or(iii) A shallow dose equivalent to the skin or extremities exceeding

50 rems (0.5 Sv); or(2)

The release of radioactive material. Inside or outside of a restricted
area, so that had an individual been present for 24 hours, theindividual could have received an intake in excess of one
occupational annual limit on intake (the provisions of this paragraph
do not apply to locations where personnel are not normally stationed
during routine operations, such as hot-cells or process enclosures).

(c) The licensee shall prepare any report filed with the Commission
pursuant to this section shall be prepared so that names of individuals
who have received exposure to radiation or radioactive material arestated in a separate and detachable part of the report.
(d) Reports made by licensees in response to the requirements of thissection must be made as follows:(1) Licensees that have an installed Emergency Notification Systemshall make the reports required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of thissection to the NRC Operations Center in accordance with 10 CFR
60.72; and344

Explorer Operator Manual(2) All other licensees shall make the reports required by paragraphs (a)and (b) of this section by telephone to the NRC Operations Center(301) 816-5100 and by telegram, mailgram or facsimile to the
Administrator of the appropriate NRC Regional Office listed inAppendix D to 10 CFR part 20.
(e) The provisions of this section do not include doses that result fromplanned special exposures, that are within the limits for planned special
exposures, and that are reported under §20.2204.
[66 FR 23406, May 21, 1991, as amended at 66 FR 40766, August 16, 1991; 67 FR 67879, Dec. 8, 1992; 69 FR
14086, Mar 26, 1994]

Section 30.34§30.34 Terms and Conditions of License(a) Each license issued pursuant to the regulations in this part and theregulations in parts 31 through 35 and 39 of this chapter shall be subject
to all the provisions, of the Act, now or hereafter in effect, and to all
valid rules, regulations, and orders of the Commission.
(b) No license issued or granted pursuant to the regulations in this part andthe regulations in Parts 31 through 35 and 39 nor any right under alicense shall be transferred, assigned or in any manner disposed of,either voluntarily or involuntarily, directly or indirectly, through transfer
of control of any license to any person, unless the Commission shall,
after securing full information, find that the transfer is in accordancewith the provisions of the Act, and shall give its consent in writing.
(c) Each person licensed by the Commission pursuant to the regulations inthis part and the regulations in parts 31 through 35 and 39 shall confine
his possession and use of the byproduct material to the locations andpurposes authorized in the license. Except as otherwise provided in thelicense, a license issued pursuant to the regulations in this part and parts
31 through 35 and 39 of this chapter shall carry with it the right toreceive, acquire, own, and possess byproduct material. Preparation forshipment and transport of byproduct material shall be in accordancewith the provisions of part 71 of this chapter.

345

Appendices(d) Each license issued pursuant to the regulations in this part and parts 31
through 35 and 39 shall be deemed to contain the provisions set forth insection 183b.-d., inclusive, of the Act, whether or not these provisions
are expressly set forth in the license.
(e) The Commission may incorporate, in any license issued pursuant to theregulations in this part and parts 31 through 35 and 39, at the time ofissuance or thereafter by appropriate rule, regulation or order, such
additional requirements and conditions with respect to the licensee’s
receipt, possession, use and transfer of byproduct material as it deems
appropriate or necessary in order to:(1) Promote the common defense and security;(2) Protect health or to minimize danger to life or property;(3) Protect restricted data;(4) Require such reports and the keeping of such records, and toprovide for such inspections of activities under the license as may
be necessary or appropriate to effectuate the purposes of the Act andregulations thereunder.
(f) Licensees required to submit emergency plans by §30.32(1) shall follow
the emergency plan approved by the Commission. The licenses maychange the approved plan without Commission approval only if thechanges do not decrease the effectiveness of the plan. The licensee shallfurnish the change to the appropriate NRC Regional Office specified in§30.6 and to affected offsite response organizations within six months
after the change is made. Proposed changes that decrease, or potentiallydecrease, the effectiveness of the approved emergency plan may not be
implemented without prior application to and prior approval by theCommission.
(g) Each licensee preparing technetium-99m radiopharmaceuticals frommolybdenum-99/technetium-99m generators shall test the generator
eluates for molybdenum-99 breakthrough in accordance with 35.204 of
this chapter. The licensee shall record the results of each test and retain
each record or three years after the record is made.
346

Explorer Operator Manual(h) (1) Each licensee shall notify the appropriate NRC Regional
Administrator, in writing, immediately following the filing of avoluntary or involuntary petition for bankruptcy under any chapterof title 11 (Bankruptcy) of the United States Code by or against;(i) The licensee;(ii) An entity (as that term is defined in 11 U.S.C. 101(14))
controlling the licensee or listing the license or licensee asproperty of the estate; or(iii) An affiliate (as that term is defined in 11 U.S.C. 101(2)) of thelicensee.
(2) This notification must indicate:(i) The bankruptcy court in which the petition for bankruptcy was
filed; and(ii) The date of the filing of the petition.
[30 FR 8185, June 26, 1965, as amended at 38 FR 33969, Dec. 10, 1973; 43 FR 6922, Feb. 17, 1978: 48 FR 32328.
July 15, 1983;52 FR 1295, Jan. 12, 1987; 52 FR 8241, Mar. 17, 1987; 53 FR 19245, May 27, 1988; 53 FR 23383,
June 22, 1988; 54 FR 14061, Apr. 7, 1989; 68 FR 7736, Feb. 9, 1993;59 FR 61780, Dec. 2, 1994]

Sections 30.51, 30.52 and 30.53
Records, Inspections, Tests and Reports§30.51
Records(a) Each person who receives by product material pursuant to a license
issued pursuant to the regulations in this part and parts 31 through 35 of
this chapter shall keep records showing the receipt, transfer, anddisposal of the byproduct material as follows:(1) The license shall retain each record of receipt of byproduct material
as long as the material is possessed and for three years following
transfer or disposal of the material.
(2) The licensee who transferred the material shall retain each record oftransfer for three years after each transfer unless a specific347Appendicesrequirement in another part of the regulations in this chapter dictatesotherwise.
(3) The licensee who disposed of the material shall retain each recordof disposal of byproduct material until the Commission terminates
each license that authorizes disposal of the material.
(b) The licensee shall retain each record that is required by the regulationsin this part and parts 31 through 35 of this chapter or by license
condition for the period specified by the appropriate regulation or
license condition. If a retention period is not otherwise specified byregulation or license condition, the record must be retained until the
Commission terminates each license that authorizes the activity that is
subject to the record keeping requirement.
(c) (1) Records which must be maintained pursuant to this part and parts 31
through 35 of this chapter may be the original or a reproduced copy
or microform if such reproduced copy or microform is duly
authenticated by authorized personnel and the microform is capableof producing a clear and legible copy after storage for the period
specified by the Commission regulations. The record may also be
stored in electronic media with the capability for producing legible,
accurate, and complete records during the required retention period.
Records such as letters, drawings, specifications, must include all
pertinent information such as stamps, initials, and signatures. The
licensee shall maintain adequate safeguards against tampering withand loss of records.
(2) If there is a conflict between the Commission’s regulations in thispart and parts 31 through 35 and 39 of this chapter, license
condition, or other written Commission approval or authorization
pertaining to the retention period for the same type of record, theretention period specified in the regulations in this part and parts 31
through 35 and 39 of this chapter for such records shall apply unlessthe Commission, pursuant to §30.11, has granted a specificexemption from the record retention requirements specified in thispart or parts 31 through 35 and 39 of this chapter.
[41 FR 18301, May 5, 1976, as amended at 43 FR 6922, Feb. 17, 1978; 52 FR 8241, Mar. 17, 1987; 53 FR 19245,
May 27, 1988; 58 FR 7736, Feb. 8, 1993]

348

Explorer Operator Manual§30.52 Inspections(a) Each licensee shall afford to the commission at all reasonable times
opportunity to inspect byproduct material and the premises and facilities
wherein byproduct material is used or stored.
(b) Each licensee shall make available to the Commission for inspection
upon reasonable notice, records kept by him pursuant to the regulationsin this chapter.
[30 FR 8185, June 26, 1965]§30.53 Tests
Each licensee shall perform or permit the Commission to perform such test as theCommission deems appropriate or necessary for the administration of theregulations in this part and parts 31 through 35 and 39 of this chapter, including testsof :(a) Byproduct material;(b) Facilities wherein byproduct material is utilized or stored;(c) Radiation detection and monitoring instruments ; and(d) Other equipment and devices used in connection with the utilization orstorage of byproduct material.
[30 FR 8185, June 26, 1965, as amended by 43 FR 6922, Feb. 17. 1978; 52 FR 8241, Mar. 17, 1987, 58 FR 7736,
Feb. 8, 1993]

Section 31.5
§31.5

Certain Measuring, Gauging or Controlling Devices1.

(a) A general license is hereby issued to commercial and industrial firms
and research, educational, and medical institutions, individuals in the
conduct of their business and Federal, State or local government
agencies to acquire, receive, possess, use, or transfer in accordance withthe provisions of paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) of this section, byproduct
1 Persons possessing byproduct material in devices under the general license in §31.5

before Jan. 15, 1975, may continue to possess, use or transfer that material in accordancewith the requirements of §31.5 in effect on Jan. 14, 1975.

349

Appendicesmaterial, contained in devices designed and manufactured for the
purpose of detecting, measuring, gauging, or controlling thickness,density, level, interface location, radiation, leakage, or qualitative or
quantitative chemical composition, or for producing light or an ionizedatmosphere.
(b) The general license in paragraph (a) of this section applies only to
byproduct material contained in devices which have been manufactured
or initially transferred and labeled in accordance with the specifications
contained in a specific license issued pursuant to §32.61 of this chapter
or in accordance with the specifications contained in a specific license
issued by an Agreement State, which authorizes distribution of devices
to persons generally licensed by the Agreement State.
(c) Any person who acquires, receives, possesses, uses, or transfers
byproduct material in a device pursuant to the general license inparagraph (a) of this section:(1) Shall assure that all labels affixed to the device at the time ofreceipt, and bearing a statement that removal of the label isprohibited, are maintained thereon and shall comply with all
instructions and precautions provided by such labels;(2) Shall assure that the device is tested for leakage of radioactive
material and proper operation of the on-off mechanism andindicator, if any, at no longer than six-month intervals or at suchother intervals as are specified in the label; however,i)

Devices containing only krypton need not be tested for leakageof radioactive material, andii) Devices containing only tritium or not more than 100
microcuries (3.7 MBq) of other beta and/or gamma emitting
material or 10 microcuries (0.37 MBq) of alpha emitting
material and devices held in storage in the original shipping
container prior to initial installation need not be tested for any
purpose;350

Explorer Operator Manual(3) Shall assure that the tests required by paragraph (c)(2) of thissection and other testing, installation, servicing and removal frominstallation involving the radioactive materials, its shielding or
containment, are performed:i)

In accordance with the instructions provided by the labels, orii) By a person holding a specific license pursuant to parts 30 and
32 of this chapter or from an Agreement State to perform suchactivities;(4) Shall maintain records showing compliance with the requirementsof paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this section. The records mustshow the results of tests. The records must also show the dates of
performance of, and the names of persons performing, testing,installing, servicing and removing from the installation radioactive
material and its shielding or containment. The records also mustshow the dates of performance of, and the names of persons
performing testing, installing, servicing and removal from theinstallation of radioactive material, its shielding or containment. The
licensee shall retain these records as follows:(i) Each record of a test for leakage of radioactive material
required by paragraph (c)(2) of this section must be retained forthree years after the next required leak test is performed or until
the sealed source is transferred or disposed of.
(ii) Each record of a test of the on-off mechanism and indicatorrequired by paragraph (c)(2) of this section must be retained forthree years after the next required test of the on-off mechanism
and indicator is performed or until the sealed source istransferred or disposed of.
(iii) Each record that is required by paragraph (c)(3) of this section
must be retained for three years from the date of the recorded
event or until the device is transferred or disposed of.
(5) Upon the occurrence of a failure of or damage to, or any indicationof a possible failure of or damage to, the shielding of the radioactive351

Appendicesmaterial or the on-off mechanism or indicator, or upon the detectionof 0.005 microcurie or more of removable radioactive material,
shall immediately suspend operation of the device until it has been
repaired by the manufacturer or other person holding a specificlicense pursuant to parts 30 and 32 of this chapter or from an
Agreement State to repair such devices, or disposed of by transfer toa person authorized by a specific license to receive the byproductmaterial contained in the device and, within 30 days, furnish to the
Administrator of the appropriate Nuclear Regulatory Commission,
Regional Office listed in Appendix D of part 20 of this chapter, areport containing a brief description of the event and the remedialaction taken;(6) Shall not abandon the device containing byproduct material;(7) Shall not export the device containing byproduct material except inaccordance with part 110 of this chapter;(8) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(9) of this section shall transfer
or dispose of the device containing byproduct material only bytransfer to a person holding a specific license pursuant to parts 30
and 32 of this chapter or from an Agreement State, to receive thedevice and within 30 days after transfer of a device to a specificlicensee shall furnish to the Director of Nuclear Material Safety and
Safeguards, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington
D.C. 20555, a report containing identification of the device bymanufacturer’s name and model number and the name and addressof the person receiving the device. No report is required if thedevice is transferred to the specific licensee in order to obtain areplacement device;(9) Shall transfer the device to another general licensee only:(i) Where the device remains in use at a particular location. In suchcase the transferor shall give the transferee a copy of thissection and any safety documents identified in the label on thedevice and within 30 days of the transfer, report to the Directorof Nuclear Material Safety and Safeguards, U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission, Washington, D. C. 20555, the352Explorer Operator Manual

manufacturer’s name and model number of device transferred,
the name and address of the transferee and the name and/or
position of an individual who may constitute a point of contact
between the Commission and the transferee; or(ii) Where the device is held in storage in the original shipping
container at its intended location of use prior to initial use by ageneral licensee;(10)
Shall comply with the provisions of §§20.2201 and 20.2202
of this chapter for reporting radiation incidents, theft, or loss oflicensed material, but shall be exempt from the other requirementsof Parts 19, 20 and 21 of this chapter.
(d) The general license in paragraph (a) of this section does not authorize
the manufacture or import of devices containing byproduct material.
[39 FR 43532, Dec. 16, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 8785, Mar. 3, 1975; 40 FR 14085, Mar. 28, 1975; 42
FR 25721, May 19, 1977; 42 FR 28896, June 6, 1977; 43 FR 6922, Feb. 17, 1978; 53 FR 19246, May 27,
1988; 56 FR 23471, May 21, 1991; 56 FR 61352, Dec. 3, 1991; 58 FR 67659, Dec. 22, 1993]353

Appendices

Canadian Atomic Energy Control Regulations
NOTE: Users of the information in this section are advised that it is provided for theconvenience of reference only and as such has no official sanction. The original
Regulations and amendments thereto should be consulted for all purposes ofinterpreting and applying the law.

Part II, Sections 3 to 7
Part II Prescribed Substances and Items
3. Subject to section 6, no person shall, unless exempted in writing by the
Board, produce, mine, prospect for, refine, use, sell or possess for any
purpose any prescribed substance except in accordance with a license
issued pursuant to section 7.
4. Subject to section 6 [and subsection 18.1(5)], no person shall, unless
exempted in writing by the Board, use, sell, or possess any device orequipment containing radioactive prescribed substances except inaccordance with a license issued pursuant to section 7.
[5. (1) No person shall(a) import any prescribed substance,(b) export any prescribed substance, or(c) export any prescribed item.]
except in accordance with a license issued pursuant to section 7.
(2) A license referred to in section (1) shall be produced by or on behalfof the licensee to a collector of customs at the port of entry into orexit from Canada of the prescribed substance or prescribed item, as
the case may be, or at such other place as designated by the Deputy
Minister of National Revenue and Excise, before the prescribed
substance or the prescribed item is released for import or export.
6. (1) No license is required by any person engaged in:354

Explorer Operator Manual(a) the transport of goods for hire or reward in respect of thetransport of any prescribed substance or any device orequipment necessary for such transport;(b) prospecting for prescribed substances if such prospecting does
not involve the removal of more than ten kilograms of uraniumor thorium from any deposit thereof in any one calendar year;(c) any use, sale or possession of a substance containing deuteriumif(i) such substance does not contain hydrogen having a greater
concentration of deuterium than is normally found innature, or(ii) such use, sale or possession does not involve more than 10
kilograms of deuterium in any calendar year where such a
substance does contain hydrogen having a greater
concentration of deuterium than is normally found innature;(d) a substance containing naturally occurring radioactive isotopesof elements of atomic number less than 80 and in no greater
concentration than is normally found in nature;(e) a substance containing radioactive isotopes of elements ofatomic number less than 90 if(i) the quantity of such isotopes per kilogram of substance does
not exceed the schedules quantity, and(ii) any such isotopes on the surface of the substance are not, inthe opinion of the Board or a designated officer, readily
dispersible and the quantity of such isotopes on the surfaceof the substance does not exceed one-tenth of the scheduled
quantity per square meter of substance;(f) sources of ionizing radiation containing radioactive isotopes of
elements of atomic number less than 90 if
355

Appendices(i) the quantity of such isotopes in each such source does
not exceed the scheduled quantity, and(ii) not more than 10 sources are required in any calendar
year;(g) any device incorporating a substance containing radioactive
isotopes of elements of atomic number less than 90 or ofamericium isotope Am-241 if(i) the total quantity of such isotopes per device does notexceed 10 times the scheduled quantity, and(ii) [the design of the device and the method ofincorporating the radioactive isotopes are approved by
the Board or a designated officer]; and(h) any incandescent mantle containing thorium.
(3) Nothing in subsection (2) authorizes the use or possession for any
purpose without a license of any substance containing(a) uranium isotope U-233; or(b) uranium having a greater concentration of the isotope U-235
than is normally found in nature.
7. (1) The Board or a designated officer may issue a license for any
purpose referred to in Section (3) or in respect of any device orequipment referred to in section (4) upon receipt of a written
application from the person requiring the license.
(2) [The application for a license referred to in subsection (1) shall
include the applicable fee set out in the AECB Cost Recovery Fees
Regulations and shall set out such of the following information ad
the Board or designated officer may require]:(a) the nature and quantity of the prescribed substance and the
purpose for which it is required;356

Explorer Operator Manual(b) the maximum quantity of the prescribed substance likely to berequired at any one time for the purpose set out in theapplication;(c) a description of the premises in which the prescribed substanceis to be located and of any equipment in connection with which
it is to be used;(d) a description of the measures to be taken to prevent theft, or loss
or any unauthorized use of the prescribed substance;(e) a description of the measures to be taken, including any plan incase of accident, to prevent the receipt by any person of a doseof ionizing radiation [or an exposure to radon daughters] inexcess of any dose specified in respect of such person in
Schedule II;(f) a description of the method of diagnosing of the radioactive
prescribed substance;(g) a description of the qualifications, training, and experience ofany person who is to use the prescribed substance; and(h) any other information necessary to evaluate the application.
(3) [A license issued by the Board or a designated officer pursuant tosubsection (1) may contain such conditions as the Board or thedesignated officer deems necessary in the interests of health, safety
and security and, without limiting the generality of the foregoing,
may include conditions respecting](a) the measures to be taken to prevent the receipt by any person ofa dose of ionizing radiation [or an exposure to radon daughters]in excess of any dose specified in respect of such person in
Schedule II;(b) the monitoring devices and other methods for measuring thedose of ionizing radiation [or exposure to radon daughters]
received by any person;357

Appendices(c) instructions to be given to atomic radiation workers respecting
the hazards of ionizing radiation and the procedures to befollowed to limit exposure to ionizing radiation;(d) the maximum quantity and concentration of radioactive or otherhazardous material that may be discharged into the air andwater as a result of the use of the prescribed substance;(e) the method of disposing of the radioactive prescribed substance;(f) the measures to be taken to prevent theft, loss or any
unauthorized use of the prescribed substance; and(g) the qualifications, training, and experience of any person who is
to use or supervise the use of the prescribed substance or any
device or equipment to which the license applies.
[(4) The Board or designated officer may issue a license to a person forany purpose referred to in subsection 5(1) on receipt of a written
application from the person.
(5) A license issued by the Board or a designated officer pursuant tosubsection (4) may contain such conditions as the Board or thedesignated officer deems necessary in the interests of health, safety
and security.]

Part VI, Section 20 and 21
Loss or Theft of Prescribed Substances
20. (1) Every person in possession of a prescribed substance or operating a
nuclear facility in which a prescribed substance is located shall, inthe event of any loss or theft of such prescribed substance in aquantity exceeding ten times the scheduled quantity, make a reportof such loss or theft within 24 hours to the inspector appointed forthe place or area in which the loss or theft occurred and shall assoon as possible thereafter send a complete report of such loss ortheft to the Board, such inspector and the person, if any, appointed

358

Explorer Operator Manual

pursuant to section 16 as radiation safety adviser for the place orarea in which the loss or theft occurred.
(2) For the purpose of subsection (1), loss does not include any loss
necessarily incidental to any authorized use of the prescribed
substance.
21. (1) Every person(a) in charge of a nuclear facility(b) in charge of a device or of equipment containing radioactive
prescribed substances, or(c) in possession of a radioactive prescribed substance shall, in theevent of an occurrence that results or is likely to result in thereceipt by any person of a dose of ionizing radiation [or of an
exposure to radon daughters] in excess of any dose [orexposure] specified in respect of such person in schedule II,(d) report such occurrence within 24 hours to the inspector
appointed for the place or area in which the occurrence hastaken place(e) as soon as possible after the occurrence, send a complete reportof such occurrence to the board, to the inspector referred to inparagraph (d) and to the person or committee appointed
pursuant to section 16 to advise on radiation safety in respect ofthe place or area in which the occurrence has taken place.
(f) if the occurrence has resulted in the receipt by any person of adose of ionizing radiation [or of an exposure to radon
daughters] in excess of any dose [or exposure] specified in
respect of such person in schedule II, send a copy of the reportreferred to in paragraph (e) to the place medical advisor
appointed for the place or area in which the occurrence hastaken place.

359

Appendices(2) In the event of any occurrence described in subsection (1), the person in
charge of a nuclear facility or the equipment containing the prescribed
substance or the person in possession of the prescribed substance, as thecase may be, shall(a) immediately take all appropriate measures to prevent or
minimize exposure of any person to ionizing radiation [or radon
daughters] resulting from such occurrence; and(b) comply with any instructions that may be given by the inspector
appointed for the place or area in which the occurrence hastaken place.

360

Explorer Operator Manual

Regulatory Agencies
NOTE: Information in this section may change without notice

Nuclear Regulatory Commission Regional Offices
RegionRegion I: Connecticut,
Delaware, District of Columbia,
Maine Maryland
Massachusetts, New
Hampshire, New Jersey, New
York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island, and Vermont.
Region II: Alabama, Florida,
Georgia, Kentucky, Mississippi,
North Carolina, Puerto Rico,
South Carolina, Tennessee,
Virginia Virgin Islands, andWest Virginia.
Region III: Illinois, Indiana,
Iowa, Michigan, Minnesota,
Missouri, Ohio, and Wisconsin
Region IV: Alaska, Arizona,
Arkansas, California, Colorado,
Hawaii, Idaho, Kansas,
Louisiana, Montana, Nebraska,
Nevada, New Mexico, North
Dakota, Oklahoma, Oregon,
Pacific Trust Territories, South
Dakota, Texas, Utah,
Washington and Wyoming.

Address
USNRC
475 Allendale Road
King of Prussia, PA
19406

Telephone(610) 337-5000(FTS) 346-5000

USNRC
101 Marietta Street, NW
Suite 2900
Atlanta, GA
30323(404) 331-4053(FTS) 242-4503

USNRC
799 Roosevelt Road
Glen Ellyn, IL
60137(708) 790-5500(FTS) 388-5500

USNRC
611 Ryan Plaza Drive
Suite 1000,
Arlington, TX
76011(817) 880-8100(FTS) 728-8100

361

Appendices

Region IV: Walnut Creek Field
OfficeUSNRC Region IV
Uranium Recovery Field
Office730 Simms Street
P.O. Box 25325
Denver, CO
80225(303) 236-2805(FTS) 776-2805

Agreement States
AlabamaDivision of Radiation Control
State Department of Public Health
P.O. Box 303017
Montgomery, Alabama 36130-3017(334)613-5391
Arkansas
Division of Radiation Control andEmergency Management
Department of Health4815 West Markham Street, Slot 30
Little Rock, Arkansas 72205-3867(501) 661-2126
Colorado
Radiation Control Division (RCDDO-B1)
Department of Public Health &Environment
4300 Cherry Creek Drive South
Denver, Colorado 80222-1530(303)692-3030
Georgia
Radioactive Materials Program
Department of Natural Resources
4244 International Parkway
Atlanta, Georgia 30354(404) 362-2675
362

Arizona
Arizona Radiation Regulatory Agency
4814 South 40th Street
Phoenix, Arizona 85040(602) 255-4845
California
Radiologic Health Branch
Food, Drugs & Radiation Safety Division
State Department of Health Services
714/744 P Street, P.O. Box 942732
Sacramento, California 94234-7320(916) 322-3482
FloridaOffice of Radiation Control
Department of Health and Rehabilitative
Services
1317 Winewood Boulevard
Tallahassee, Florida 32399-0700(904) 487-2437
Illinois
Department of Nuclear Safety
1035 Outer Park Drive
Springfield, Illinois 62704(217)994-9928

Explorer Operator Manual

Iowa
Bureau of Radiological Health
Iowa Department of Public Health
Lucas State Office Building
Des Moines, Iowa 50319(515) 242-6280

KansasX-Ray & RAM Control Section
Department of Health & Environment
Bureau of Air and Radiation
Forbes Field, Building 283
Topeka, Kansas 66620(913) 296-1562
KentuckyLouisiana
Conf. of Radiation Control Program
Radiation Protection Division
Directors, Inc.
Office of Air Quality and Radiation
275 East Main Street
Protection
Frankfort, Kentucky 40601
Department of Environmental Quality(502) 564-3700
7290 Bluebonnet Road
P.O. Box 82135
Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70808-2135(504) 765-0160
Maine
MarylandDivision of Health Engineering
Radiological Health Program
Radiation Control Program
Air and Radiation Management
State House, Station 10
Administration
Augusta, Maine 04333-0010
Maryland Department of the(207)287-5676
Environment
2500 Broening Highway
Baltimore, Maryland 21224(410) 631-3301*Massachusetts
Mississippi
Radiation Control Program
Division of Radiological Health
Department of Public HealthState Department of Health305 South Street, 7th Floor
3150 Lawson Street
Jamaica Plain, Massachusetts 02130 P.O. Box 1700
(617) 727-6214
Jackson, Mississippi 38215-1700(601) 354-6167
Nebraska
NevadaNebraska Department of HealthRadiological Health Section
3016 Centennial Mall Drive
Department of Human Resources
Lincoln, Nebraska 68509-5007
505 East King Street(402) 471-6444
Carson City, Nevada 89710(702) 687-5394
363

Appendices

New Hampshire
Radiological Health Bureau
Division of Public Health Services
Health and Welfare Building
6 Hazen Drive
Concord, New Hampshire 033016527(603) 271-4588
New York
Radiological Health Unit
Division of Safety and Health
New York Sate Department of Labor
New York State Office Campus
Building 12, Room 457
Albany, New York 12240(518) 457-1202
North Dakota
Division of Environmental
Engineering
Department of Health1200 Missouri Avenue, Room 304
P.O. Box 5520
Bismarck, North Dakota 585025520(701) 328-5188*Oklahoma
Radiation Management Section
Department of Environmental
Quality1000 NE 10th Street
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 731171212(405)271-7484*Pennsylvania
Bureau Of Radiation Protection
Department of Environmental
Protection
P.O. Box 8469
364

New Mexico
Bureau of Hazardous & Radioactive
Materials
Water and Waste Management Division
Department of Environment
P.O. Box 26110, 2044 Galisteo Road
Santa Fe, New Mexico 87502(505) 827-1557
North Carolina
Division of Radiation Protection
Department of Environment, Health &Natural Resources
3825 Barrett Drive
P.O. Box 27687
Raleigh, North Carolina 27609(919) 571-4141*Ohio
Bureau of Radiation Protection
Division of Environmental HealthOhio Department of Health
P.O. Box 118
Columbus, Ohio 43266(614) 644-2727
OregonRadiation Protection Services
State Health Division
Department of Human Resources
800 N.E. Oregon Street, Suite 260
Portland, Oregon 97232(503) 731-4014
Rhode Island
Division of Occupational and Radiologic
HealthDepartment of HealthRoom 206 Cannon Building,Explorer Operator Manual

Harrisburg, Pennsylvania 171058469(717)787-3720

3 Capital Hill
Providence, Rhode Island 02908-5097(401) 277-2438

South Carolina

Tennessee

Division of Radioactive Waste
Management

Division of Radiological HealthBureau of Solid and Hazardous
Waste
Department of Health andEnvironmental Control
2600 Bull Street
Columbia, South Carolina 29201(803) 737-7400
Texas
Bureau of Radiation Control
Texas Department of Health1100 W. 49th Street
Austin, Texas 78756-3189(512) 834-6688

Department of Environment andConservation
L & C Annex, 3rd Floor
401 Church Street
Nashville, Tennessee 37243-1532(615)532-0364
Utah
Division of Radiation Control
Department of Environmental Quality
168 North 1950 West
P.O. Box 144850
Salt Lake City, Utah 84114-4850(801) 536-4250

Washington
Division of Radiation Protection
Department of HealthAirdustrial Center, Building #5
P.O. Box 47827
Olympia, Washington 98504-7827(360)753-3353*Letter of intent received from Governor to become an Agreement State

365

Appendices

Canadian Atomic Energy Control Board
The Canadian Atomic Energy Control Board (AECB) can be contacted at:
Atomic Energy Control Board
2805 Slater Street
Ottawa, Ontario, K1P 5S9(613) 995-5894

366

Explorer Operator Manual

Wipe Test Agencies
Wipe test kits may be ordered directly from the agency providing the service.
In locations, other than Canada and the US, contact INFICON for further
information

United States
National Leak Test Center
P.O. Box 486
North Tonawanda, New York 14120
Tel: 716-693-0550

CanadaContact the AECB for more organizations providing leak testing services.

367